2008 QUEST OWNER'S MANUAL

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN Before driving your vehicle please read this Own- ● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with er’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity for important safety information.
confidence. It was produced using the latest with controls and maintenance requirements, as-
techniques and strict quality control. sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle. MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This manual was prepared to help you under- This vehicle should not be modified.
stand the operation and maintenance of your WARNING Modification could affect its
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome- IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE- performance, safety or durability, and
ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this MINDERS FOR SAFETY! may even violate governmental
manual before operating your vehicle. regulations. In addition, damage or per-
Follow these important driving rules to
A separate Warranty Information Booklet help ensure a safe and complete trip for formance problems resulting from modi-
explains details about the warranties cov- you and your passengers! fications may not be covered under
ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service NISSAN warranties.
● NEVER drive under the influence of al-
and Maintenance Guide” explains details
cohol or drugs.
about maintaining and servicing your ve-
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer ● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will and never drive too fast for conditions.
explain how to resolve any concerns you
● ALWAYS give your full attention to driv-
may have with your vehicle, as well as
ing and avoid using vehicle features or
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon
taking other actions that could distract
law.
you.
Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle ● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-
best. When you require any service or have any priate child restraint systems. Preteen
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the children should be seated in the rear
extensive resources available to them. seat.
● ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.

੬ REVIEW COPY—2008 Quest (van)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
06/29/07—debbie ੭

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all options CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
available on this model. Therefore, you may find WARNING
some information that does not apply to your
vehicle.
WARNING
All information, specifications and illustrations in
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
this manual are those in effect at the time of
and certain vehicle components contain
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
or emit chemicals known to the State of
specifications or design without notice and with-
California to cause cancer and birth de-
out obligation.
fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
THIS MANUAL and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
You will see various symbols in this manual. They State of California to cause cancer and
are used in the following ways: APD1005 birth defects or other reproductive harm.
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”
WARNING
or “Do not let this happen.”
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-
risk, the procedures must be followed tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the
precisely. vehicle.

CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
hazard that could cause minor or moder- indicate movement or action.
ate personal injury or damage to your ve-
hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-
cedures must be followed carefully. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
call attention to an item in the illustration.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-
ies, may contain perchlorate material. The
following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate
Material – special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

BLUETOOTH௡ is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed to
Xanavi Informatics
Corporation.

© 2007 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to following information:
For U.S. customers
provide NISSAN directly with comments or – Your name, address, and telephone number Nissan North America, Inc.
questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the Consumer Affairs Department
sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s P.O. Box 685003
number:
side) Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For U.S. customers
– Date of purchase For Canadian customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
Nissan Canada Inc.
(1-800-647-7261) – Current odometer reading 5290 Orbitor Drive
For Canadian customers – Your NISSAN dealer’s name Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
1-800-387-0122
– Your comments or questions
OR

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

Table of Illustrated table of contents 0
Contents Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1
Instruments and controls 2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4
Starting and driving 5
In case of emergency 6
Appearance and care 7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8
Technical and consumer information 9
Index 10

06/29/07—debbie ੭

0 Illustrated table of contents

Airbags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

06/29/07—debbie ੭

AIRBAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS

1. 3rd row bench center seat belt
(P. 1-15)
2. 3rd row bench seat belts (P. 1-15)
3. Top tether strap anchor points (P. 1-30)
4. 2nd row captain’s chair seat belts
(P. 1-15)
5. Front seat belts (P. 1-15)
6. Roof mounted curtain side-impact air
bag (P. 1-52)
7. Supplemental front-impact air bags
(if so equipped) (P. 1-52)
8. Seats (P. 1-2)
9. Occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor) (P.1-59)
10. Seat belt with pretensioners (P. 1-64)
11. Top tether strap anchor for vehicles
without 2nd or 3rd row seats (P. 1-31)
12. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bags (P. 1-52)
13. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) (P. 1-28)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.

LII0073

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

06/29/07—cathy ੭

EXTERIOR FRONT

1. Engine hood (P. 3-14)
2. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-18)
3. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)
4. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-16)
5. Windshield (P. 8-17)
6. Power windows (P. 2-36)
7. Door locks, keyfob, keys
(P. 3-3, 3-9, 3-2)
8. Mirrors (P. 3-23)
9. Tire pressure (P. 9-11)
10. Flat tire (P. 6-2)
11. Tire chains (P. 8-37)
12. Fog light switch (P. 2-22)
13. Tie down/towing hooks (P. 6-12)

LII0074

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

06/29/07—debbie ੭

EXTERIOR REAR

1. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-18)
2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)
3. Lift gate (P. 3-14)
4. Lift gate release (P. 3-18)
5. Rear view monitor (if so equipped)
(P.4-28)
6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)
7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation
(P. 3-19, P. 9-3)
8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-19)
9. Sliding doors (P. 3-5, P. 3-6)

LII0075


06/29/07—debbie ੭

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

1. DVD entertainment system
2. Personal lights (P. 2-42)
3. Skyview roof (if so equipped) (P. 2-39)
4. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-40)
5. Map lights (P. 2-43),
Console light P.2-44)
6. Sun visors (P. 3-22)
7. HomeLinkா (if so equipped) (P. 2-44)
8. Glove box (P. 2-30)
9. Seats (P. 1-2)
10. Center tray table (if so equipped)
(P. 2-29)
11. Armrest (P.1-9)

LII0076


06/29/07—cathy ੭

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Ventilators (P. 4-30)
2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-18)
3. Steering wheel switch for audio
control/Bluetoothா hands-free phone
system (if so equipped) (P. 4-62)
4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-52, P. 2-24)
5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
6. Cruise control main/set switches
(P. 5-13)
7. Windshield wiper/washer switch and
rear window wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-16, 2-17)
8. Display screen/Navigation system*
(P. 4-2, P. 4-7, P. 4-17)
9. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-52)
10. Glove box (P. 2-30)
11. Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-60)
12. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-23)
13. Climate controls (P. 4-31, 4-40)
14. Audio system controls (P. 4-43)
controls (P. 4-2, P. 4-7, P. 4-17)
LIC0928 16. Power outlets (P. 2-26)


06/29/07—debbie ੭

17. Shift selector lever (P. 5-8)
18. Ignition switch (P. 5-6)
19. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-21)
20. Rear sonar system off switch
21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off
switch (if so equipped) or Traction
Control System (TCS) off switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-25, P. 2-25)
22. Lights on demand switch (P. 2-41)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).


06/29/07—debbie ੭

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS

1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)
2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)
3. Air cleaner (P. 8-16)
4. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)
5. Battery (P. 8-13)
6. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-20)
7. Transmission dipstick (P. 8-11)
8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)
9. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)
10. Drive belt location (P. 8-14)
11. Fuse block (P. 8-20)
12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-12)
13. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)

WDI0515


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning Name Page Warning Name Page Indicator Name Page
light light light

Anti-lock Braking 2-8 Low windshield 2-10 Malfunction Indica- 2-11
or System (ABS) warn- washer fluid warning tor Light (MIL)
ing light light
Overdrive off indica- 2-11
Seat belt warning 2-10 tor light
Brake warning light 2-8 light and chime
Front passenger air 2-11
or Supplemental air 2-10 bag status light
bag warning light
Security indicator 2-12
light
Charge warning 2-8
light Indicator Name Page
light Slip indicator light 2-12
Door open warning 2-8
light Automatic transmis- 2-11
sion position indica- Traction Control 2-12
tor light System off indicator
Engine oil pressure 2-9
light (if so equipped)
warning light
Cruise main switch 2-11
indicator light Turn signal/hazard 2-13
Low fuel warning 2-9
indicator lights
light
Cruise set switch 2-11
indicator light Vehicle Dynamic 2-13
Low tire pressure 2-9
Control off indicator
warning light
High beam indicator 2-11 light (if so equipped)
light (blue)


06/29/07—debbie ੭

MEMO


1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Front manual seat adjustment Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Front power seat adjustment Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 SYSTEM (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
2nd row captain’s chair adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
3rd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Child restraint installation using LATCH-
Front-Seat Active Head Restraints 2nd row captain’s chairs (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 1-33
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Child restraint installation using LATCH-
3rd row bench seat (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Head restraint adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Child restraint installation using the seat
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Booster seat installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Precautions on supplemental restraint
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66

06/29/07—cathy ੭

SEATS

Seat Fold/Adjust Summary
Position: Operation/page:
1st row All (P. 1-2)
Forward/backward adjust (P. 1-6)
Recline (P. 1-6)
2nd row
Tip-up for 3rd row entry (P. 1-7)
Folding for cargo (P. 1-10)
Recline (P. 1-7)
3rd row Folding (P.1-12)
Stow (P.1-12)

FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
ARS1152

WARNING ● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when be upright. Always sit well back in the
the seatback is reclined. This can be seat with both feet on the floor and
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not adjust the seat properly. See “Precau-
be against your body. In an accident, tions on Seat Belt Usage” later in this
you could be thrown into it and receive section.
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and ● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
receive serious internal injuries. to make sure it is securely locked.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

06/29/07—debbie ੭

WRS0520 WRS0521 WRS0131
Forward and backward Reclining Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s
Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean seat)
seat forward or backward to the desired position. back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of
Release the lever to lock the seat in position. up and lean your body forward. Release the lever the seat cushion to the desired position.
to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in P (Park).

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

06/29/07—debbie ੭

WRS0518 WRS0522
Lumbar support (driver’s seat) FRONT POWER SEAT Forward and backward
The lumbar support feature provides lower back ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped) Moving the switch forward or backward will slide
support to the driver. Move the lever up or down the seat forward or backward to the desired
to adjust the seat lumbar area.
Operating tips position.
● The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
Reclining
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, Move the recline switch backward until the de-
then reactivate the switch. sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
● Do not operate the power seat switch for a forward again, move the switch forward and
long period of time when the engine is off. move your body forward. The seatback will move
This will discharge the battery. forward.

See “Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped)”
in “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” for auto-
matic drive positioner operation.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later
in this section). Also, the seatback can be re-
clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-
hicle is stopped and the transmission is in P
(Park).

WRS0523 WRS0518
Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s Lumbar support (driver’s seat)
seat) The lumbar support feature provides lower back
Push the front or rear end of the switch up or support to the driver. Move the lever up or down
down to adjust the angle and height of the seat to adjust the seat lumbar area.
cushion.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

While seated, pull the lever᭺and hold it while
1
you slide᭺ the seat forward or backward to the
2
desired position. Release the lever to lock the
seat in position.

WRS0705 LRS0625

2ND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIR Reclining
ADJUSTMENT To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever and
lean back.
Forward and backward
The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat
WARNING back for occupants of different sizes for added
comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit
● The 2nd row seats are heavy. Be careful (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this
when folding and unfolding. section). Also, the seatback can be reclined to
● To avoid injury to yourself and others, allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
keep hands and body clear when stopped.
folding.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LRS0626 LRS0320 SPA1025
Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd row 3RD ROW BENCH SEAT FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD
The 2nd row captain’s chairs can be tipped for- ADJUSTMENT RESTRAINTS (if so equipped)
ward for easy entry or exit from the 3rd row bench Reclining
seat. To enter the 3rd row bench seat , lift up on WARNING
the lever located on the lower base of the 2nd Lift up on the latch in the center of the seatback to ● Always adjust the head restraints prop-
row captain’s chair to tip the seat forward. To exit adjust the back of the seat. Release the latch to erly as specified in this section. Failure
the 3rd row bench seat, pull back on the lever on lock the seatback into position. to do so can reduce the effectiveness of
the lower base of the 2nd row captain’s chair and the Active Head Restraint.
push the seat forward.
● Active Head Restraints are designed to
supplement other safety systems. Al-
ways wear seat belts. No system can
prevent all injuries in any accident.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

● Do not attach anything to the head re-
straint stalks. Doing so could impair
Active Head Restraint function.
The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-
ing the force that the seatback receives from the
occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement
of the head restraint helps support the occu-
pant’s head by reducing its backward movement
and helping absorb some of the forces that may
lead to whiplash type injuries.
Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions
at low to medium speeds in which it is said that
whiplash injury occurs most.
LRS0286 LRS0678
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain Type A — Front Type B — 2nd row
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head
restraints return to their original positions. HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT WARNING
Properly adjust the Active Head Restraints as To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, Head restraints should be adjusted prop-
described in this section. push and hold the lock knob and push the head erly as they may provide significant pro-
restraint down. tection against injury in an accident. Do
not remove them. Check the adjustment
To adjust the head restraint forward or backward after someone else uses the seat.
(Type B only), push it in the direction required.
The front seats and 2nd row captain’s chairs
head restraints are removable. See “Head re-
straint storage” in the “Instrument and controls”
section. The 3rd row bench seat head restraints
are not removable.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

armrest to the stowed position, then pull it to the
resting position and adjust to the desired height.
FLEXIBLE SEATING
WARNING
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seats when they are
in the fold-down position. In a collision,
people riding in these areas without
proper restraints are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area
WRS0134 WRS0531 of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level ARMRESTS in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
with the center of your ears. seat belt properly.
To use the armrests, pull them down to the rest-
ing position. ● Do not fold down the rear seats when
occupants are in the rear seat area or
᭺
A Resting position any luggage is on the rear seats.
᭺
B Stowed position ● Head restraints should be adjusted
Adjustable front seat armrest’s (if so properly as they may provide significant
protection against injury in an accident.
equipped) Always replace and adjust them prop-
To use the adjustable seat armrest, pull it down to erly if they have been removed for any
the resting position. Adjust the armrest to the reason.
desired position by raising the armrest to the
desired height and releasing the armrest. To re-
adjust the armrest to a lower position, raise the

06/29/07—debbie ੭

● If the head restraints are removed for
any reason, they should be securely
stored to prevent them from causing
injury to passengers or damage to the
vehicle in case of sudden braking or an
accident.
● When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched posi-
tion. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-
vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not LRS0627 LRS0628
place cargo higher than the seatbacks. Folding Folding the 2nd row captain’s chair
In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal injury. To fold the seatback forward, for cargo hauling, ᭺
1 Fold the 2nd row captain’s chairs to the floor
lift up on the recline lever and fold the seatback for maximum cargo hauling, move the head
over the seat base. restraints forward before folding.
᭺
2 Lift up on the recline lever to fold the seat-
back forward on the seat base.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LRS0702 LRS0629 LRS0630
᭺
3 Push down on the small knob on the back of ᭺
4 Then fold the entire seat forward into the
the seat to release the base of the seat. stowed position in the floor.
᭺
5 Reverse this process to return the 2nd row
captain’s chairs to a seating position.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

2. To fold the 3rd row bench seat flat into the
floor, for maximum cargo hauling, pull the
strap on the seatback to allow all three head
restraints to fold forward. If the head re-
straints are in the folded position, the seat
may not be latched into the floor.

LRS0675 LRS0676
Folding Folding the 3rd row bench seat
To fold the seatback forward, for cargo hauling,
lift up on the latch in the center of the seatback to WARNING
fold the seatback over the seat base. ● The 3rd row bench seat is heavy. Be
careful when folding and unfolding.
● To avoid injury to yourself or others,
keep hands and body clear of floor
opening when folding.
1. Disconnect and secure the center seat belt
and tongues into the retractor base. See
“Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt” later
in this section.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LRS0677 WRS0706 WRS0707
3. Pull back on the pull strap to release the 4. Pull up on the lever located on the back of 5. The entire seat will rotate toward you and
back of the seat. Rotate the seatback toward the seat base. This will fold the seat base stow in the floor.
the back of the vehicle. toward the back of the vehicle.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WARNING
● Do not unfasten the rear center seat
belt connector except when folding
down the rear seat.
● When attaching the rear center seat
belt connector, be certain that the seat-
backs are completely secured in the
latched position and the rear center
seat belt connector is completely
secured.
● If the rear center seat belt connector
and the seatbacks are not secured in
WRS0708 LRS0703 the correct position, serious personal
injury may result in an accident or sud-
6. The rear seat anchors are spring loaded and 7. Reverse this process to return the bench den stop.
can be folded into the side panels to maxi- seat to a seating position. Make sure to
mize cargo space. The anchors are held in properly return the head restraints to ● When returning the seatbacks, be sure
the folded position by the items in the cargo the upright position, push the bench to attach the rear center seat belt
area. When the load is removed from the seat down into the floor, and pull back connector.
cargo area, the rear seat anchors automati- on the seatback until they latch into
cally return to the unfolded position. place.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

SEAT BELTS

SSS0136
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-
justed and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,
even if your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be worn
at all times when a vehicle is being driven.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

SSS0134 SSS0016

WARNING WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this ● The seat belt should be properly ad-
vehicle should use a seat belt at all justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
times. Children should be properly re- reduce the effectiveness of the entire
strained in the rear seat and, if appro- restraint system and increase the
priate, in a child restraint. chance or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. Serious injury or death can occur
if the seat belt is not worn properly.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely ● All seat belt assemblies, including re-
fastened to the proper buckle. tractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
mends that all seat belt assemblies in
effectiveness.
use during a collision be replaced un-
● Do not allow more than one person to less the collision was minor and the
use the same seat belt. belts show no damage and continue to
● Never carry more people in the vehicle operate properly. Seat belt assemblies
than there are seat belts. not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either
● If the seat belt warning light glows con- damage or improper operation is noted.
tinuously while the ignition is turned
ON with all doors closed and all seat ● All child restraints and attaching hard-
SSS0014 belts fastened, it may indicate a mal- ware should be inspected after any col-
function in the system. Have the system lision. Always follow the restraint
WARNING checked by a NISSAN dealer. manufacturer’s inspection instructions
and replacement recommendations.
● Always route the shoulder belt over ● Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti- The child restraints should be replaced
your shoulder and across your chest. vated, it cannot be reused and must be if they are damaged.
Never run the belt behind your back, replaced together with the retractor.
under your arm or across your neck. The See your NISSAN dealer. CHILD SAFETY
belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off your shoulder. ● Removal and installation of preten- Children need adults to help protect them.
sioner system components should be They need to be properly restrained.
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as done by a NISSAN dealer.
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE In addition to the general information in this
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could manual, child safety information is available from
increase the risk of internal injuries in many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
an accident. government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

There are three basic types of child restraint for infants and small children. See “Child Re- facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s
systems: straints” later in this section. instructions for minimum and maximum weight
and height recommendations. NISSAN recom-
● Rear facing child restraint Also, there are other types of child restraints
mends that small children be placed in child
available for larger children for additional protec-
● Front facing child restraint restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle
tion.
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
● Booster seat
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens Safety Standards. You should choose a child
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size. and children be restrained in the rear seat. restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less According to accident statistics, children the manufacturer’s instructions for installation
than 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rear are safer when properly restrained in the and use.
facing child restraints. Front facing child re- rear seat than in the front seat.
straints are available for children who outgrow Larger children
This is especially important because your
rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys- Children who are too large for child restraints
old. Booster seats are used to help position a tem (Air bag system) for the front passen- should be seated and restrained by the seat belts
vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no ger. See “Supplemental restraint system” which are provided. The seat belt may not fit
longer use a front facing child restraint. later in this section. properly if the child is less than 4 feet 9 inches
(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18
WARNING Infants kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed used to obtain proper seat belt fit.
Infants and children need special protec-
tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit in a rear facing child restraint. NISSAN recom- NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a
them properly. The shoulder belt may mends that infants be placed in child restraints commercially available booster seat if the shoul-
come too close to the face or neck. The that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety der belt in the child’s seating position fits close to
lap belt may not fit over their small hip Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat
bones. In an accident, an improperly fit- Standards. You should choose a child restraint belt goes across the abdomen. The booster seat
ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu- should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is
injury. Always use appropriate child facturer’s instructions for installation and use. properly positioned across the top, middle por-
restraints. tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the
Small Children
hips. A booster seat can only be used in seating
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri- Children that are over one year old and weigh at positions that have a three-point type seat belt.
tories require the use of approved child restraints least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

06/29/07—debbie ੭

have a label certifying that it complies with Fed- THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian WITH RETRACTOR
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child
has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or
WARNING
near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt
without the booster seat. ● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
WARNING times.
Never let a child stand or kneel on any ● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
seat and do not allow a child in the cargo the seatback is reclined. This can be
areas while the vehicle is moving. The dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
child could be seriously injured or killed in be against your body. In an accident,
an accident or sudden stop. you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
PREGNANT WOMEN could also slide under the lap belt and LRS0607
receive serious internal injuries. Power front seat shown
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, ● For the most effective protection when Fastening the seat belts
and always position the lap belt as low as pos- the vehicle is in motion, the seat should 1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this
sible around the hips, not the waist. Place the be upright. Always sit well back in the section.
shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your seat with both feet on the floor and
chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your adjust the seat belt properly.
abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow
the driver and passengers some freedom of
movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during
certain impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child
restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
WRS0137 WRS0138
after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-
᭺
2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor ᭺
3 Position the lap belt portion low and snug straints” later in this section for more information.
and insert the tongue into the buckle until on the hips as shown.
you hear and feel the latch engage. The ALR mode should be used only for
᭺
4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the child restraint installation. During normal
● The retractor is designed to lock during retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
seat belt use by a passenger, the ALR mode
a sudden stop or on impact. A slow shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
should not be activated. If it is activated it
pulling motion permits the seat belt to and across your chest.
move, and allows you some freedom of may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-
The front passenger seat, 2nd row captain’s sion. It can also change the operation of
movement in the seat.
chairs and the rear bench seat three-point seat the front passenger air bag. See “Front
● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from belts have two modes of operation: passenger air bag and status light” later in
its fully retracted position, firmly pull this section.
● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
the belt and release it. Then smoothly
pull the belt out of the retractor. ● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)


06/29/07—debbie ੭

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
WARNING
check the operation as follows.
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely se- ● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
cured in the latched position. If they are quickly. The retractor should lock and re-
not completely secured, passengers may strict further belt movement.
be injured in an accident or sudden stop. If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any questions about seat belt opera-
tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

WRS0139
Unfastening the seat belts
᭺
1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on
the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-
tracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
movement by two separate methods:
● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor.
● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

SSS0240 SSS0241
Center of the 3rd row bench seat WARNING
The 3rd row center seat belt has a connector ● Always fasten the connector tongue
tongue ᭺ and a seat belt tongue ᭺ . Both the
1 2 and the seat belt in the order shown.
connector tongue and the seat belt tongue must
be securely latched for proper seat belt opera- ● Always make sure both the connector
tion. tongue and the seat belt tongue are
secured when using the seat belt. Do
not use it with only the seat belt tongue
attached. This could result in serious
personal injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop.

LRS0432


06/29/07—debbie ੭

Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt ● If the rear center seat belt connector
When folding down the 3rd row seat, the 3rd row and the seatbacks are not secured in
center seat belt can be retracted into a stowed the correct position, serious personal
position as follows: injury may result in an accident or sud-
den stop.
᭺
1 Hold the connector tongue so that the seat
belt does not retract suddenly when the
tongue is released from the connector
buckle. Release the connector tongue by
inserting a suitable tool such as a key into the
connector buckle ᭺. A

᭺
2 Retract the seat belt up to the retractor base.
᭺
3 Insert the seat belt tongue into the fabric
sleeve so it will lay flat. Then secure the
connector tongue into the retractor base.

WARNING
● Do not unfasten the rear center seat
belt connector except when folding
down the rear seat.
belt connector, be certain that the seat-
backs are completely secured in the
latched position and the rear center
secured.

LRS0433


06/29/07—debbie ੭

Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt
WARNING
Always be sure the 3rd row center seat belt ● Do not unfasten the rear center seat
connector tongue and connector buckle are at- belt connector except when folding
tached. Disconnect only when folding down the down the rear seat.
rear seat.
To connect the buckle: belt connector, be certain that the seat-
᭺
1 Pull out the connector tongue from the re- backs are completely secured in the
tractor base. latched position and the rear center
᭺
2 Pull out the seat belt tongue from the fabric secured.
sleeve.
● If the rear center seat belt connector
᭺
3 Pull the seat belt and secure the receiver and the seatbacks are not secured in
buckle until it clicks. the correct position, serious personal LRS0294
The center seat belt connector tongue and re- injury may result in an accident or sud- Front seats
ceiver buckle are indicated by the > and < mark. den stop.
Shoulder belt height adjustment (Front
The center seat belt connector tongue can be and 2nd row seats)
attached only into the rear center seat belt con-
nector buckle. The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-
justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-
To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seat
tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)
belt” earlier in this section.
To adjust, push or pull out᭺ the adjustment
1
button and move the shoulder belt anchor᭺to 2
the desired position, so the belt passes over the
center of the shoulder. The belt should be away
from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock
the shoulder belt anchor into position.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
If, because of body size or driving position, it is ● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt mild soap solution or any solution recom-
and fasten it, an extender is available which is mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
compatible with the installed seat belts. The ex- Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
length and may be used for either the driver or seat belts to retract until they are completely
front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN dry.
dealer for assistance if an extender is required.
● If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
WARNING belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
by the same company which made the
● Periodically check to see that the seat
LRS0242 original equipment seat belts, should
belt and the metal components, such as
2nd row seats be used with NISSAN seat belts.
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
WARNING ● Adults and children who can use the and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,
standard seat belt should not use an deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
● After adjustment, release the adjust- extender. Such unnecessary use could webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-
ment button and try to move the shoul- result in serious personal injury in the sembly should be replaced.
der belt anchor up and down to make event of an accident.
sure it is securely fixed in position.
● Never use seat belt extenders to install
● The shoulder belt anchor height should child restraints. If the child restraint is
be adjusted to the position best for you. not secured properly, the child could be
Failure to do so may reduce the effec- seriously injured in a collision or a sud-
tiveness of the entire restraint system den stop.
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

CHILD RESTRAINTS

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An in-
flating front air bag could seriously in-
jure or kill your child. A rear-facing child
restraint must only be used in the rear
seat.
● NISSAN recommends that the child re-
straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-
cording to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat. If
you must install a front facing child re-
ARS1098 WRS0256 straint in the front seat, see “Child re-
straint installation using the seat belts”
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD WARNING later in this section.
RESTRAINTS ● Improper use or improper installation
● Infants and small children should al-
ways be placed in an appropriate child of a child restraint can increase the risk
restraint while riding in the vehicle. or severity of injury for both the child
Failure to use a child restraint can re- and other occupants of the vehicle and
sult in serious injury or death. can lead to serious injury or death in an
accident.
● Infants and small children should never
be carried on your lap. It is not possible ● Follow all of the child restraint manu-
for even the strongest adult to resist the facturer’s instructions for installation
forces of a severe accident. The child and use. When purchasing a child re-
could be crushed between the adult and straint, be sure to select one which will
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the fit your child and vehicle. It may not be
same seat belt around both your child possible to properly install some types
and yourself. of child restraints in your vehicle.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

● If the child restraint is not anchored ● When your child restraint is not in use, Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
properly, the risk of a child being in- keep it secured with the LATCH System infants and small children of various sizes. When
jured in a collision or a sudden stop or a seat belt to prevent it from being selecting any child restraint, keep the following
greatly increases. thrown around in case of a sudden stop points in mind:
or accident. ● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
● Child restraint anchor points are de-
signed to withstand only those loads that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
imposed by correctly fitted child re- CAUTION Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
straints. Under no circumstances are Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
Remember that a child restraint left in a
they to be used for adult seat belts or closed vehicle can become very hot. ● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
harnesses. Check the seating surface and buckles sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi- before placing your child in the child and seat belt system.
tioned to fit the child restraint, but as restraint.
● If the child restraint is compatible with your
upright as possible. vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
● After attaching the child restraint, test it restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the and check the various adjustments to be
before you place the child in it. Push it Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System sure the child restraint is compatible with
from side to side while holding the seat or LATCH. Some child restraints include two rigid your child. Choose a child restraint that is
near the LATCH attachment or by the designed for your child’s height and weight.
or webbing-mounted attachments that can be
seat belt path. Try to tug it forward and Always follow all recommended procedures.
connected to these lower anchors. For details,
check to see if the belt holds the re- see the “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
straint in place. The child restraint System (LATCH)” later in this section. territories require that infants and small
should not move more than 1 inch (25 children be restrained in an approved child
mm). If the restraint is not secure, If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint at all times while the vehicle is
tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. See being operated.
restraint in another seat and test it “Child restraint installation using the seat belts”
again. You may need to try a different later in this section. In general, child restraints are
child restraint. Not all child restraints fit also designed to be installed with the lap portion
in all types of vehicles. of a lap/shoulder seat belt.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WRS0315 LRS0631 WRS0691
LATCH system anchor locations LATCH label locations 2nd row captain’s LATCH label locations 3rd row bench (if so
LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHERS chairs (if so equipped) equipped)
FOR CHILDREN SYSTEM (LATCH) LATCH lower anchor point locations WARNING
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of the ● Attach LATCH compatible child re-
points that are used with Lower Anchors and seat cushion near the seatback. A label is at- straints only at the locations shown in
Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH) compat- tached to the seatback to help you locate the the illustration. If a child restraint is not
ible child restraints. LATCH anchors. secured properly, your child could be
seriously injured or killed in an
The LATCH anchor points are provided to install
accident.
child restraints in the following positions only:
● 2nd row captain’s chairs (if so equipped).
● 3rd row bench seat center position only (if
so equipped).


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WRS0700 LRS0661 LRS0662
LATCH lower anchor location LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
● Child restraint anchor points are de- Installing child restraint LATCH anchor turer. If you have such a child restraint, refer to the
signed to withstand only those loads attachments illustration for the seating positions equipped
imposed by correctly fitted child re- with LATCH system anchors which can be used
LATCH compatible child restraints include two to secure the child restraint.
straints. Under no circumstance are
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
they to be used for adult seat belts or LATCH child restraints generally require the use
be connected to two anchors located at certain
harnesses. of a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap child
seating positions in your vehicle. This system is
known as the LATCH system. This system may restraint” later in this section for installation in-
also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX structions.
compatible system. With this system, you do not
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child
restraint. Check your child restraint for a label and follow the instructions in this manual and
stating that it is compatible with the LATCH sys- those supplied with the child restraint. See “Child
tem. This information may also be in the instruc- restraint installation using LATCH on 2nd row
tions provided by the child restraint manufac- captain’s chairs (if so equipped)” or “Child re-


06/29/07—debbie ੭

straint installation using LATCH on 3rd row Top Tether Anchor Point Locations
bench seat (if so equipped)” in this section.
Anchor points are located in the following loca-
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD tions:
RESTRAINT ● On the floor behind the front passenger seat
If the manufacturer of your child restraint requires (2–passenger cargo van only) as shown.
the use of a top tether strap, it must be secured to ● On the back of the 2nd row captain’s chairs
the anchor point. (if so equipped) as shown.
● On the back of the 3rd row center seating
WARNING position (if so equipped) as shown.
● Child restraint anchor points are de-
If you have any questions when installing a
signed to withstand only those loads
top tether strap child restraint on the rear
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for de- WRS0210
straints. Under no circumstances are
tails. Label
they to be used for adult seat belts or
harnesses. The front passenger seat and 2nd row captain’s
● Do not allow cargo to contact the top chair anchor point locations are marked with the
tether strap when it is attached to the label shown.
top tether anchor. Properly secure the Installing top tether strap
cargo so it does not contact the top
tether strap. Cargo that is not properly First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH
secured or cargo that contacts the top system (2nd row captain’s seating positions and
tether strap may damage it during a center seating position only of the 3rd row bench
collision. Your child could be seriously seat) or the seat belt, as applicable.
injured or killed in a collision if the top
tether strap is damaged.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
For best child restraint fit, see the child restraint
installation instructions in this section and the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

LRS0322 LRS0307
Front passenger seat (2 passenger cargo 2nd row captain’s chairs (if so equipped)
van only)
1. Top tether strap
For the front passenger seat in the 2 passenger
2. Anchor point
cargo van only, install the top tether strap as
follows: For the 2nd row captain’s chairs (if so equipped),
install the top tether strap as follows:
1. Adjust the head restraint to its highest posi-
tion. 1. Remove the head restraint. Store it in a
secure location.
2. Route the top tether strap between the head
restraint and the top of the seatback. 2. Position the top tether strap over the top of
the seatback.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point on the floor directly behind the seat. 3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point on the seat directly behind the child
restraint.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
For best child restraint fit, see the child restraint
installation instructions in this section and the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WRS0687 WRS0688
Type A Type B
3rd row bench seat (if so equipped) The center position of the 3rd row bench seat is
the seating position that can use a top tether
1. Top tether strap
strap.
2. Anchor point
For the 3rd row bench seat (if so equipped),
install the top tether strap as follows:
WARNING
1. Position the top tether strap under the head
In the 3rd row bench seat, a child restraint
with a top tether strap can only be used in restraint (TYPE A) or position the top tether
the center position. Do not place in an strap around the side of the head restraint
outboard seating position and attempt to (TYPE B).
angle the tether strap to the center 2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
position. point on the seat directly behind the child
restraint.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

3. Tighten the tether strap according to the ● Inspect the lower anchors by inserting
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any your fingers into the lower anchor area
slack. and feeling to make sure there are no
For best child restraint fit, see the child restraint obstructions over the LATCH anchors,
installation instructions in this section and the such as seat belt webbing or seat cush-
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. ion material. The child restraint will not
be secured properly if the LATCH an-
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION chors are obstructed.
USING LATCH-2ND ROW Front-facing
CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS (if so equipped)
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child
restraint in the 2nd row captain’s chairs using
WARNING
LATCH:
● Attach LATCH compatible child re-
straints only at the locations shown. For 1. Recline the seatback if the seatback is ad- LRS0663

the LATCH lower anchor locations, see justable to assist in attaching the child re- Front facing web-mounted – step 3
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil- straint to the lower anchors. 3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
dren System (LATCH)” in this section. If 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al- ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
a child restraint is not secured properly, ways follow the child restraint manufactur- to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
your child could be seriously injured or er’s instructions. erly attached to the lower anchors.
killed in an accident.
4. Return the seatback to its normal upright
● The LATCH anchors are designed to and locked position.
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under The back of the child restraint should be secured
no circumstance are they to be used for against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust
adult seat belts or harnesses. or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct
child restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjust-
ment” in this section. If the head restraint is re-
moved, store it in a secure place. Be sure to
install the head restraint when the child restraint


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LRS0664 LRS0671 WRS0697
Front facing rigid-mounted – step 3 Front facing – step 5 Front facing – step 7
is removed. If the seating position does not have 5. For child restraints that are equipped with 7. Before placing the child in the child restraint,
an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering webbing mounted attachments, remove any hold the child restraint near the LATCH at-
with the proper child restraint fit, try another additional slack from the anchor attach- tachment and use force to push the child
seating position or a different child restraint. ments. Press downward and rearward firmly restraint from side to side, and tug it forward
in the center of the child restraint with your to make sure that it is securely held in place.
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If
and seatback while tightening the webbing it does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull
of the anchor attachments. again on the anchor attachments to further
6. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to
tether strap, route the top tether strap and properly secure the restraint, move the re-
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor straint to another seating position and try
point. See “Top tether strap child restraint” in again, or try a different child restraint. Not all
this section. child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

8. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 4
through 7.
Rear-facing
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint in the 2nd row captain’s chairs using
LATCH:
1. Recline the seatback if the seatback is ad-
justable to assist in attaching the child re-
straint to the lower anchors.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur- LRS0665 LRS0666
er’s instructions. Rear facing web-mounted – step 3 Rear facing rigid-mounted – step 3
3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
erly attached to the lower anchors.
and locked position.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

through 6.
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING LATCH-3RD ROW BENCH
SEAT (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Attach LATCH compatible child re-
straints only at the locations shown. For
the LATCH lower anchor locations, see
LRS0673 LRS0674 “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-
Front facing – step 5 Front facing – step 6 dren System (LATCH)” in this section. If
5. For child restraints that are equipped with a child restraint is not secured properly,
6. Before placing the child in the child restraint,
webbing mounted attachments, remove any your child could be seriously injured or
hold the child restraint near the LATCH at-
additional slack from the anchor attach- killed in an accident.
tachment and use force to push the child
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly restraint from side to side, and tug it forward ● The LATCH anchors are designed to
in the center of the child restraint with your to make sure that it is securely held in place. withstand only those loads imposed by
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If correctly fitted child restraints. Under
and seatback while tightening the webbing it does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull no circumstance are they to be used for
of the anchor attachments. again on the anchor attachments to further adult seat belts or harnesses.
tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to
properly secure the restraint, move the re-
straint to another seating position and try
again, or try a different child restraint. Not all
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

● Inspect the lower anchors by inserting
your fingers into the lower anchor area
and feeling to make sure there are no
obstructions over the LATCH anchors,
such as seat belt webbing or seat cush-
ion material. The child restraint will not
be secured properly if the LATCH an-
chors are obstructed.
Front-facing
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child
restraint in the 3rd row bench seats using
LATCH:
1. Recline the seatback if the seatback is ad- WRS0685 WRS0686
justable to assist in attaching the child re- Front facing web-mounted – step 3 Front facing rigid-mounted – step 3
straint to the lower anchors. 3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al- ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
ways follow the child restraint manufactur- to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
er’s instructions. erly attached to the lower anchors.
The back of the child restraint should be secured
against the vehicle seatback. If the seating posi-
tion does not have an adjustable head restraint
and it is interfering with the proper child restraint
fit, try another seating position or a different child
restraint.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

6. If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. See “Top tether strap child restraint” in
this section. Do not install child restraints
that require the use of the top tether strap to
seating positions that do not have a top
tether anchor.

LRS0671 LRS0672
Front facing – step 5 Front facing – step 7
5. For child restraints that are equipped with 7. Before placing the child in the child restraint,
webbing mounted attachments, remove any hold the child restraint near the LATCH at-
additional slack from the anchor attach- tachment and use force to push the child
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly restraint from side to side, and tug it forward
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If
of the anchor attachments again on the anchor attachments to further


06/29/07—debbie ੭

through 8.
Rear-facing
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint in the 3rd row bench seats using
LATCH:
1. Recline the seatback in vehicles with adjust-
able seatbacks to assist in attaching the
child restraint to the lower anchors.
ways follow the child restraint manufactur- WRS0689 WRS0690
er’s instructions. Rear facing web-mounted – step 3 Rear facing rigid-mounted – step 3
3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure that the LATCH attachment is
properly attached to the lower anchors.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

through 6.

LRS0673 LRS0674
Front facing – step 5 Front facing – step 6
5. For child restraints that are equipped with 6. Before placing the child in the child restraint,
webbing mounted attachments, remove any hold the child restraint near the LATCH at-
additional slack from the anchor attach- tachment and use force to push the child
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly restraint from side to side, and tug it forward
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If
of the anchor attachments. again on the anchor attachments to further


06/29/07—debbie ੭

● NISSAN recommends that child re- ● When installing a child restraint system
straints be installed in the rear seat. in the rear center position, both the
However, if you must install a forward center seat belt connector tongue and
facing child restraint in the front pas- buckle tongue must be secured. See
senger seat, move the passenger seat “Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt”
to the rearmost position. Also, be sure earlier in this section.
the front passenger air bag status light
● A child restraint with a top tether strap
is illuminated to indicate the passenger
should not be used in the front passen-
air bag is OFF. See “Front passenger air
ger seat except for the 2-passenger
bag and status light” later in this sec-
cargo van.
tion for details.
● Front-facing child restraints can be in-
● The three-point seat belt in your vehicle
stalled in all 3rd row bench seat posi-
is equipped with an Automatic Locking
tions. However, front-facing child re-
Retractor (ALR) which must be used
WRS0256 straints that require the use of a top
when installing a child restraint.
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION tether strap can be installed in the cen-
● Failure to use the ALR mode will result ter 3rd row position only. Do not install
USING THE SEAT BELTS in the child restraint not being properly a child restraint requiring a top tether
secured. The restraint could tip over or strap in an outboard position and at-
WARNING otherwise be unsecured and cause in- tempt to angle the tether to the 3rd row
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air jury to the child in a sudden stop or center anchor.
Bag System, never install a rear-facing collision. Also, it can change the opera-
tion of the front passenger air bag. See The instructions in this section apply to child
child restraint in the front passenger restraint installation using the vehicle seat belts in
seat. Front air bags inflate with great “Front passenger air bag and status
light” later in this section. the rear seats or the front passenger seat.
force. A rear-facing child restraint could
be struck by the front air bag in a crash
and could seriously injure or kill your
child.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions
The back of the child restraint should be secured
against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust
or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct
child restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjust-
ment” in this section.
If the head restraint is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint
when the child restraint is removed. If the seating
position does not have an adjustable head re-
straint and it is interfering with the proper child
WRS0699 restraint fit, try another seating position or a dif- WRS0680
Front-facing (front passenger seat) – step 1 ferent child restraint. Front facing – step 3
Front-facing 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
seats or in the front passenger seat: structions for belt routing.
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
front-facing direction only. Move the
seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and therefore
must not be used in the front seat.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LRS0667 LRS0668 WRS0681
Front facing – step 4 Front facing – step 5 Front facing – step 6
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the 6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) the center of the child restraint with your
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode and seatback while pulling up on the seat
when the seat belt is fully retracted. belt.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

8. Before placing the child in the child restraint,
hold the child restraint near the seat belt
path and use force to push the child restraint
from side to side, and tug it forward to make
sure that it is securely held in place. It should
not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does
move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on
the shoulder belt to further tighten the child
restraint. If you are unable to properly secure
the restraint, move the restraint to another
seating position and try again, or try a differ-
ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in
all types of vehicles.
9. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode
WRS0698 WRS0475
by trying to pull more seat belt out of the
Front facing – step 7 retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt Front facing – step 11
7. If the child restraint is equipped with a top webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is 11. If the child restraint is installed in the front
tether strap, route the top tether strap and in the ALR mode. passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor the ON position. The front passenger air bag
10. Check to make sure the child restraint is status light should illuminate. If this
point. See “Top tether strap child restraint” in
properly secured prior to each use. If the light is not illuminated see ЉFront passenger
this section. Do not install child restraints seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3
that require the use of a top tether strap to air bag and status lightЉ in this section.
through 8. Move the child restraint to another
seating positions that do not have a top
tether anchor. seating position. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-
straint mode) is canceled.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WRS0256 WRS0761 LRS0669
Rear-facing – step 1 Rear facing – step 2 Rear facing – step 3
Rear-facing 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child 3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in- mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the
seats: structions for belt routing. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
1. Child restraints for infants must be when the seat belt is fully retracted.
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LRS0670 WRS0762 WRS0763
Rear facing – step 4 Rear facing – step 5 Rear facing – step 6
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the 5. Remove any additional slack from the child 6. Before placing the child in the child restraint,
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. restraint; press downward and rearward hold the child restraint near the seat belt
firmly in the center of the child restraint to path and use force to push the child restraint
compress the vehicle seat cushion and seat- from side to side, and tug it forward to make
back while pulling up on the seat belt. sure that it is securely held in place. It should
not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does
move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on
the shoulder belt to further tighten the child
restraint. If you are unable to properly secure
the restraint, move the restraint to another
rear seating position and try again, or try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

BOOSTER SEATS

7. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode ● Infants and small children should never
by trying to pull more seat belt out of the be carried on your lap. It is not possible
retractor. If you cannot pull any more seat for even the strongest adult to resist the
belt webbing out of the retractor, the retrac- forces of a severe accident. The child
tor is in the ALR mode. could be crushed between the adult and
8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the
properly secured prior to each use. If the belt same seat belt around both your child
is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 7. and yourself.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat ● NISSAN recommends that the booster
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint seat be installed in the rear seat. Ac-
mode) is canceled. cording to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat. If
ARS1098 you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, see “Booster seat installa-
PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER tion” in this section.
SEATS ● A booster seat must only be installed in
a seating position that has a
WARNING lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a
● Infants and small children should al- three-point type seat belt with a
ways be placed in an appropriate child booster seat can result in a serious in-
restraint while riding in the vehicle. jury in sudden stop or collision.
Failure to use a child restraint or ● Improper use or improper installation
booster seat can result in serious injury of a booster seat can increase the risk
or death. or severity of injury for both the child
and other occupants of the vehicle and
can lead to serious injury or death in an
accident.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

● Do not use towels, books, pillows or ● After placing the child in the booster
other items in place of a booster seat. seat and fastening the seat belt, make
Items such as these may move during sure the shoulder portion of the belt is
normal driving or a collision and result away from the child’s face and neck and
in serious injury or death. Booster seats the lap portion of the belt does not
are designed to be used with a cross the abdomen.
lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de-
● Do not put the shoulder belt behind the
signed to properly route the lap and
child or under the child’s arm. If you
shoulder portions of the seat belt over
must install a booster seat in the front
the strongest portions of a child’s body
seat, see “Booster seat installation”
to provide the maximum protection dur-
later in this section.
ing a collision.
● When your booster seat is not in use,
● Follow all of the booster seat manufac-
keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-
turer’s instructions for installation and
vent it from being thrown around in LRS0455
use. When purchasing a booster seat,
case of a sudden stop or accident. Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
be sure to select one which will fit your
child and vehicle. It may not be possible several manufacturers. When selecting any
to properly install some types of CAUTION booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
booster seats in your vehicle. Remember that a booster seat left in a ● Choose only a booster seat with a label
● If the booster seat and seat belt is not closed vehicle can become very hot. certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
used properly, the risk of a child being Check the seating surface and buckles Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
injured in a collision or a sudden stop before placing your child in the booster Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
greatly increases. seat.
● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi- sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
tioned to fit the booster seat, but as and seat belt system.
upright as possible.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION
WARNING
NISSAN recommends that booster seats
be installed in the rear seat. However, if
you must install a booster seat in the front
passenger seat, move the passenger’s
seat to the rearmost position.

CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Auto-
matic Locking Retractor mode when using
a booster seat with the seat belts.
LRS0453 LRS0512
● Make sure the child’s head will be properly All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
territories require that infants and small rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seat back must be at or above the children be restrained in an approved child
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a restraint at all times while the vehicle is
low back booster seat ᭺ is chosen, the
1 being operated.
vehicle seat back must be at or above the The instructions in this section apply to booster
center of the child’s ears. If the seat back is seat installation in the rear seats or the front
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a passenger seat.
high back booster seat ᭺ should be used.
2

● If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with your
child. Always follow all recommended pro-
cedures.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

WRS0699 LRS0513 LRS0512
1. If you must install a booster seat in the Rear center position Rear outboard position
front seat, move the seat to the rear- 3. The booster seat should be positioned on
most position. the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces-
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only sary, adjust or remove the head restraint to
place it in a front facing direction. Always obtain the correct booster seat fit. See
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in- “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this
structions. section. If the head restraint is removed,
store it in a secure place. Be sure to install
the head restraint when the booster seat is
removed. If the seating position does not
have an adjustable head restraint and it is
interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
try another seating position or a different
booster seat.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions for adjusting the belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
belt routing.

LRS0454 WRS0475
Front passenger position 7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc- passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to
tions for properly fastening a seat belt the ON position. The front passenger air bag
shown in the “Three-point seat belt with status light may or may not illuminate,
retractor” earlier in this section. depending on the size of the child and the
type of booster seat being used. See “Front
passenger air bag and status light” later in
this section.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM

PRECAUTIONS ON Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT mental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the head of occu-
SYSTEM pants in front and rear outboard seating positions
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec- in certain side impact collisions. The curtain air
tion contains important information concerning bags are designed to inflate on the side where
the following systems: the vehicle is impacted.
These supplemental restraint systems are de-
● Driver and passenger supplemental front-
signed to supplement the crash protection pro-
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
vided by the seat belts and are not a substitute
System) for them. Seat belts should always be correctly
● Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- worn and the occupant seated a suitable dis-
mental air bag tance away from the steering wheel, instrument
panel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlier
● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple- in this section for instructions and precautions on
mental air bag seat belt usage.
● Seat belt with pretensioner The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON or
Supplemental front-impact air bag system:
START position.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help
cushion the impact force to the head and chest of After turning the ignition key to the ON
the driver and front passenger in certain frontal position, the supplemental air bag warning
collisions. light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- seconds if the system is operational.
mental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the chest area of the
driver and front passenger in certain side impact
collisions. The side air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

● The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
Advanced Air Bag System monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt us-
age then inflates the air bags. Failure to
properly wear seat belts can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident.
● The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor) that turns the front
passenger air bag OFF under some
WRS0031 conditions. This sensor is only used in
this seat. Failure to be properly seated
WARNING ● The seat belts and the front air bags are and wearing the seat belt can increase
most effective when you are sitting well the risk or severity of injury in an acci-
● The front air bags ordinarily will not back and upright in the seat. The front dent. See “Front passenger air bag and
inflate in the event of a side impact, rear air bags inflate with great force. Even status light” later in this section.
impact, rollover, or lower severity fron- with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tal collision. Always wear your seat ● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-
tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning
belts to help reduce the risk or severity ing wheel. Placing them inside the
forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-
of injury in various kinds of accidents. steering wheel rim could increase the
tion in any way, you are at greater risk of
risk that they are injured when the front
● The front passenger air bag will not injury or death in a crash. You may also
air bag inflates.
inflate if the passenger air bag status receive serious or fatal injuries from the
light is lit or if the front passenger seat front air bag if you are up against it
is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air when it inflates. Always sit back against
bag and status light” later in this the seatback and as far away as practi-
section. cal from the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel. Always use the seat belts.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

ARS1133 ARS1041

WARNING
● Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

WARNING
● Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat, if possible.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

ARS1045 WRS0256 WRS0431
Do not lean against the door.
WARNING
WARNING
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
child restraint in the front seat. An in- mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
flating front air bag could seriously inside-impact supplemental air bags:
jure or kill your child. See “Child re-
● The side air bags and curtain air bags
straints” earlier in this section for
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of
details.
a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various kinds
of accidents.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WARNING
● The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective when
you are sitting well back and upright in
the seat with both feet on the floor. The
side air bag and curtain air bag inflate
with great force. Do not allow anyone to
place their hand, leg or face near the
side air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side roof
rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window or
SSS0162 lean against the door. Some examples WRS0306
of dangerous riding positions are
shown in the previous illustrations. WARNING
● When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat, do
not hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may
be seriously injured. Be especially care-
ful with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
● Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with side
air bag inflation.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

SSS0159

LRS0679
1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact 4. Supplemental front-impact air bag
supplemental air bag inflators modules
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact 5. Crash zone sensor
supplemental air bag (driver’s side) 6. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
3. Seat belt buckle switches 7. Occupant classification system control
unit

06/29/07—cathy ੭

8. Occupant classification sensor Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an dealer. If you are considering modification of your
(pressure sensor) indication of proper front air bag system opera- vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact
9. Seat belt with pretensioner tion. NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the
10. Satellite sensors front of this Owner’s Manual.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual
11. Front seat-mounted side-impact stage inflators. It also monitors information from When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
supplemental air bag modules the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.
12. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant clas- This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
supplemental air bag (passenger’s side) sification sensor (pressure sensor) and passen- fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may
ger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation is cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System based on the severity of a collision and seat belt of a breathing condition should get fresh air
(front seats) usage for the driver. For the front passenger, it promptly.
additionally monitors the weight of an occupant
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad- Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
or object on the seat and seat belt tension. Based
vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front help to cushion the impact force on the face and
on information from the sensors, only one front air
passenger seats. This system is designed to chest of the front occupants. They can help save
bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the
meet certification requirements under U.S. regu- lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an
crash severity and whether the front occupants
lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However, inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions
are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front
all of the information, cautions and warn- or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide
passenger air bag may be automatically turned
ings in this manual still apply and must be restraint to the lower body.
OFF under some conditions, depending on the
followed. weight detected on the passenger seat and how Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag tem, seat belts should be correctly worn and the
is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be driver and passenger seated upright as far as
located in the center of the steering wheel. The
illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will practical away from the steering wheel or instru-
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is
not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See ment panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in
mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in order to help protect the front occupants. Be-
The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher this section for further details. One front air bag cause of this, the force of the front air bag inflating
severity frontal collisions, although they may in- inflating does not indicate improper performance can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is
flate if the forces in another type of collision are of the system. too close to, or is against, the front air bag module
similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. during inflation.
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. If you have any questions about your air bag
system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

06/29/07—cathy ੭

The front air bags operate only when the Status light
ignition switch is in the ON or START posi-
tion. The front passenger air bag status light is
located near the climate controls in the center of
After turning the ignition key to the ON the instrument panel. The light operates as fol-
position, the supplemental air bag warning lows:
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 ● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The is
seconds if the system is operational. OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF
and will not inflate in a crash.
● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,
child or child restraint as outlined in this
section: The illuminates to indicate
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and
WRS0475 will not inflate in a crash.
Front passenger air bag and status light ● Occupied passenger seat and the passen-
ger meets the conditions outlined in this
WARNING section: The light is OFF to indicate
The front passenger air bag is designed to that the front passenger air bag is opera-
automatically turn OFF under some con- tional.
ditions. Read this section carefully to
Front passenger air bag
learn how it operates. Proper use of the
seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec- The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-
essary for most effective protection. Fail- matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated
ure to follow all instructions in this under some conditions as described below in
manual concerning the use of seats, seat accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front
belts and child restraints can increase the passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a
risk or severity of injury in an accident. crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your
vehicle are not part of this system.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce air bag should be automatically turned OFF as crash instead of being OFF. See “Child re-
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag required by the regulations. straints” earlier in this section for proper use and
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such installation.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-
properly seated and using the seat belt as out- If the front passenger seat is not occupied the
matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used
lined in this manual should not cause the passen- passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
to meet the requirements.
ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
One sensor used is the occupant classification small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush- the object’s weight detected by the occupant
front passenger seat cushion and is designed to ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting classification sensor. Other conditions could also
detect an occupant and objects on the seat by on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
weight. It works together with seat belt sensors of position), this could cause the sensor to turn standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
described later. For example, if a child is in the the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag Sys- improperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode, Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants
tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag this could cause the air bag to be turned OFF. are seated and restrained properly.
OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can
child restraint of the type specified in the regula- belt properly for the most effective protection by
monitor when the front passenger air bag is au-
tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’s the seat belt and supplemental air bag.
tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.
weight can be detected and cause the air bag to
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil- The light will not illuminate when the front pas-
turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat. senger seat is unoccupied.
tion can vary depending on the front passenger
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child
seat belt sensors. If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-
restraints and booster seats be properly installed
ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating
The front passenger seat belt sensors are de- in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant
that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the
signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the classification sensor and seat belt sensors are
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat
amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when designed to operate as described above to turn
properly or not using the seat belt properly.
it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) the front passenger air bag OFF for specified
mode (child restraint mode). Based on the child restraints as required by the regulations. If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
weight on the seat detected by the occupant Failing to properly secure child restraints and to the passenger air bag status light may or may not
classification sensor and the belt tension de- use the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or be illuminated, depending on the size of the child
tected on the seat belt, the Advanced Air Bag move in an accident or sudden stop. This can and the type of child restraint being used. If the air
System determines whether the front passenger also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that

06/29/07—debbie ੭

the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be in the center of the instrument panel, will blink. ● Do not make unauthorized changes to
that the child restraint or seat belt is not being Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-
used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is pension system or front end structure.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag
installed properly, the seat belt is used properly This could affect proper operation of
precautions
and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air the front air bag system.
bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the
WARNING ● Tampering with the front air bag system
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
● Do not place any objects on the steer- may result in serious personal injury.
If the passenger air bag status light will not illu- ing wheel pad or on the instrument Tampering includes changes to the
minate even though you believe that the child panel. Also, do not place any objects steering wheel and the instrument
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are between any occupant and the steering panel assembly by placing material
properly positioned, the system may be sensing wheel or instrument panel. Such ob- over the steering wheel pad and above
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is jects may become dangerous projec- the instrument panel or by installing
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the tiles and cause injury if the front air bag additional trim material around the air
system is OFF by using a special tool. However, inflates. bag system.
until you have confirmed with your dealer that ● Modifying or tampering with the front
● Immediately after inflation, several
your air bag is working properly, reposition the front air bag system components will be passenger seat may result in serious
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. hot. Do not touch them; you may se- personal injury. For example, do not
verely burn yourself. change the front seats by placing mate-
The air bag system and passenger air bag status rial on the seat cushion or by installing
light will take a few seconds to register a change ● No unauthorized changes should be additional trim material, such as seat
in the passenger seat status. For example, if a made to any components or wiring of covers, on the seat that are not specifi-
large adult who is sitting in the front passenger the supplemental air bag system. This is cally designed to assure proper air bag
seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag to prevent accidental inflation of the operation. Additionally, do not stow any
status light will go from OFF to ON for a few supplemental air bag or damage to the objects under the front passenger seat
seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system supplemental air bag system. or the seat cushion and seatback. Such
operation and does not indicate a malfunction. objects may interfere with the proper
operation of the occupant classifica-
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air tion sensor (pressure sensor).
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
light , located in the meter and gauges area


06/29/07—debbie ੭

● No unauthorized changes should be inflate if the forces in another type of collision are
made to any components or wiring of similar to those of a higher severity side impact.
the seat belt system. This may affect the They are designed to inflate on the side where the
front air bag system. Tampering with vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in cer-
the seat belt system may result in seri- tain side collisions.
ous personal injury. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
● Work on and around the front air bag indication of proper side air bag and curtain air
system should be done by a NISSAN bag operation.
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
ment should also be done by a NISSAN
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed
dealer. The Supplemental Restraint
by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
System (SRS) wiring should not be
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken
modified or disconnected. Unautho-
not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
rized electrical test equipment and WRS0532 choking. Those with a history of a breathing con-
probing devices should not be used on
Front seat-mounted side-impact dition should get fresh air promptly.
the air bag system.
● A cracked windshield should be re- supplemental air bag and roof- Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
placed immediately by a qualified re- mounted curtain side-impact help to cushion the impact force on the chest of
the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to
pair facility. A cracked windshield could supplemental air bag systems cushion the impact force to the head of occu-
affect the function of the supplemental
air bag system. The side air bags are located in the outside of the pants in the front and rear outboard seating po-
seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags sitions. They can help save lives and reduce
● The SRS wiring harness connectors are are located in the side roof rails. These systems serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag
yellow and orange for easy and curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other
are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help
identification. injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not
reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occu-
provide restraint to the lower body.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you pants. However, all of the information, cau-
inform the buyer about the front air bag system tions and warnings in this manual still ap- The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections ply and must be followed. The side air bags driver and passenger seated upright as far as
in this Owner’s Manual. and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat
higher severity side collisions, although they may passengers should be seated as far away as

06/29/07—debbie ੭

practical from the door finishers and side roof ● Right after inflation, several side air bag ● Work around and on the side air bag
rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate and curtain air bag system components and curtain air bag systems should be
quickly in order to help protect the front and rear will be hot. Do not touch them; you may done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation
outboard occupants. Because of this, the force of severely burn yourself. of electrical equipment should also be
the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir-
increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too ● No unauthorized changes should be
ing harnesses* should not be modified
made to any components or wiring of
close to, or is against, these air bag modules or disconnected. Unauthorized electri-
the side air bag and curtain air bag
during inflation. The side air bag and curtain air cal test equipment and probing devices
systems. This is to prevent damage to or
bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. should not be used on the side air bag
accidental inflation of the side air bag
system.
The side air bags and curtain air bags op- and curtain air bag systems.
erate only when the ignition switch is in the ● Do not make unauthorized changes to * The SRS wiring harness connectors are
ON or START position. your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- yellow and orange for easy identification.
After turning the ignition key to the ON pension system or side panel. This When selling your vehicle, we request that you
position, the supplemental air bag warning could affect proper operation of the
inform the buyer about the side air bag and
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to
warning light will turn off after about 7 ● Tampering with the side air bags may the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
seconds if the system is operational. result in serious personal injury. For
example, do not change the front seats Seat belts with pretensioners (Front
WARNING by placing material near the seatbacks seats)
or by installing additional trim material,
● Do not place any objects near the seat- such as seat covers, around the side air
back of the front seats. Also, do not WARNING
bag.
place any objects (an umbrella, bag, ● The pretensioners cannot be reused af-
etc.) between the front door finisher ter activation. They must be replaced
and the front seat. Such objects may together with the retractor and buckle
become dangerous projectiles and as a unit.
cause injury if a side air bag inflates.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

● If the vehicle becomes involved in a The pretensioner system activates in conjunction system may not function properly. They must be
frontal collision but a pretensioner is with the front air bag system. The pretensioner checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the
not activated, be sure to have the pre- system also activates with curtain and rollover air nearest NISSAN dealer.
tensioner system checked and, if nec- bags in certain types of rollover collisions or near When selling your vehicle, we request that you
essary, replaced by your NISSAN rollovers. Working with the seat belt retractor, it inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
dealer. helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be- and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
comes involved in certain types of collisions, in this Owner’s Manual.
● No unauthorized changes should be
helping to restrain front seat occupants.
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to pre- The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt
vent damage to or accidental activation retractor. These seat belts are used the same way
of the pretensioners. Tampering with as conventional seat belts.
the pretensioner system may result in
serious personal injury. When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This
● Work around and on the pretensioner smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
system should be done by a NISSAN
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
ment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test of a breathing condition should get fresh air
equipment and probing devices should promptly.
not be used on the pretensioner system. After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow
● If you need to dispose of a pretensioner the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to
or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN reduce forces against the chest.
dealer. Correct pretensioner disposal If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys-
procedures are set forth in the appropri-
tem, the supplemental air bag warning
ate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect
light will not come on, will flash intermit-
disposal procedures could cause per-
sonal injury. tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on
after the ignition key has been turned to the ON or
START position. In this case, the pretensioner


06/29/07—debbie ੭

When the ignition key is in the ON or START
position, the supplemental air bag warning light
illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-
sioner systems need servicing:
● The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
● The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
● The supplemental air bag warning light does
LRS0318 LRS0100
not come on at all.
1. SRS Front Air Bag Warning Labels SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
2. SRS Front Seat-Mounted Side-Impact Under these conditions, the front air bags, side
WARNING LIGHT air bags, curtain air bags or pretensioners may
Supplemental Air Bag Warning Label
The supplemental air bag warning light, not operate properly. They must be checked and
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG displaying in the instrument panel, moni- repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest
WARNING LABELS tors the circuits of the supplemental front-impact NISSAN dealer.
Warning labels about the supplemental front- air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
impact air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact mental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact WARNING
supplemental air bag, and roof-mounted curtain supplemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner If the supplemental air bag warning light
side-impact supplemental air bag systems are systems. The monitored circuits include the Air is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration. bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, sat- side air bags, curtain air bag and/or pre-
ellite sensors, side air bag modules, curtain air tensioner systems will not operate in an
bag modules, pretensioners and all related wir- accident. To help avoid injury to yourself
ing. or others, have your vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

Repair and replacement procedure ● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags air bag systems, and the pretensioner
system should be inspected by a
and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a
NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to
one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is
the front end or side portion of the
damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light vehicle.
remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.
Repair and replacement of these supplemental ● If you need to dispose of a supplemen-
air bag systems should be done only by a tal air bag or pretensioner or scrap the
NISSAN dealer. vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Cor-
rect supplemental air bag and preten-
When maintenance work is required on the ve- sioner disposal procedures are set forth
hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air in the appropriate NISSAN Service
bags, pretensioners and related parts should be Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures
pointed out to the person performing the mainte- could cause personal injury.
nance. The ignition switch should always be in
the LOCK position when working under the hood
or inside the vehicle.

WARNING
● Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag
module will not function again and
must be replaced. Additionally, if any of
the front air bags inflate, the activated
pretensioners must also be replaced.
The air bag module and pretensioners
should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.
The air bag module and pretensioners
cannot be repaired.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . 2-7 Traction Control System (TCS) off switch
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Rear sonar system off switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . 2-25
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Instrument panel storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Console box (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Center tray table (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-20 Cargo net (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Overhead console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

06/29/07—debbie ੭

Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Cargo organizer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
3rd row armrest bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Console light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Cargo area storage bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 HomeLinkா universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . . 2-44
Garment hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Programming HomeLinkா. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Roof rack (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Programming HomeLinkா for Canadian
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Operating the HomeLinkா universal
Power vent windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Manual vent windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
SkyView™ glass-paneled roof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 2-39 Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Reprogramming a single HomeLinkா button . . . . . . 2-47
Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Lights on demand switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

06/29/07—debbie ੭

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Ventilators (P. 4-30)
2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-18)
3. Steering wheel switch for audio
control/Bluetoothா hands-free phone
system (if so equipped) (P. 4-62)
4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-52, P. 2-24)
5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
6. Cruise control main/set switches
(P. 5-13)
7. Windshield wiper/washer switch and
rear window wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-16, 2-17)
(P. 4-2, P. 4-7, P. 4-17)
9. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-52)
10. Glove box (P. 2-30)
11. Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-60)
12. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-23)
13. Climate controls (P. 4-31, 4-40)
14. Audio system controls (P. 4-43)
controls (P. 4-2, P. 4-7, P. 4-17)
LIC0928 16. Power outlets (P. 2-26)

2-2 Instruments and controls

06/29/07—debbie ੭

METERS AND GAUGES

17. Shift selector lever (P. 5-8)
18. Ignition switch (P. 5-6)
19. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-21)
20. Rear sonar system off switch
21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off
switch (if so equipped) or Traction
Control System (TCS) off switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-25, P. 2-25)
22. Lights on demand switch (P. 2-41)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).

LIC0929
1. Tachometer
2. Warning/indicator lights
3. Speedometer
4. Engine coolant temperature gauge
5. Fuel gauge
6. Odometer/Twin trip odometer
Instruments and controls 2-3

06/29/07—debbie ੭

The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.

LIC0930 LIC0953
1. Speedometer Changing the display:
2. Odometer Pushing the change button changes the display
3. Change button as follows:
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Trip → Trip → Trip
Speedometer Resetting the trip odometer:
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-
ond resets the trip odometer to zero.
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
Elapsed time, driving distance and average
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed speed information is also available. Refer to
when the ignition switch is in the ON position. “Control panel buttons” in the “Display screen,
heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems”
The odometer records the total distance the ve- section later in this manual.
hicle has been driven.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-
mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. If the engine is over-
heated, continued operation of the ve-
hicle may seriously damage the engine.
See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In
case of emergency” section for immediate
action required.

LIC0931 LIC0932
TACHOMETER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo- GAUGE
lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-
into the red zone ᭺.
1
ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the
normal range ᭺ when the gauge needle points
1
CAUTION within the zone shown in the illustration.
When engine speed approaches the red
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-
gine speed. Operating the engine in the outside air temperature and driving conditions.
red zone may cause serious engine
damage.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,
the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as
possible. After a few driving trips,
the light should turn off. If the
light remains on after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer.
LIC0933 ● For additional information, see “Mal-
FUEL GAUGE function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in
this section.
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the
ignition key is turned to OFF.
The low fuel warning light comes on when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-
ters E (Empty).


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) Seat belt warning light and chime Front passenger air bag status light
warning light

or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light

Charge warning light Automatic transmission position indicator light Slip indicator light

Door open warning light Cruise main switch indicator light Traction control system off indicator light (if so
equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise set switch indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low fuel warning light High beam indicator light (Blue) Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light (if so
equipped)

Low tire pressure warning light Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

Low windshield washer fluid warning light Overdrive off indicator light

CHECKING BULBS The following lights come on briefly and then go If any light fails to come on, it may indicate
off: a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake electrical system. Have the system repaired
and turn the ignition key to the ON position or , , , , , ,
promptly.
without starting the engine. The following lights
will come on:
, or , , ,


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WARNING LIGHTS Low brake fluid warning light ● If the brake fluid level is below the
or Anti-lock Braking When the ignition key is in the ON position, the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
System (ABS) light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
comes on while the engine is running with the brake system has been checked at a
warning light NISSAN dealer.
parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, perform the following:
the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light
Charge warning light
illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
ABS is operational. as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main- If this light comes on while the engine is running,
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this it may indicate the charging system is not func-
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the manual. tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check
engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN
system checked by a NISSAN dealer. warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer immediately.
dealer.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func- CAUTION
tion is turned off. The brake system then operates WARNING
normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See Do not continue driving if the generator
ЉBrake systemЉ in the ЉStarting and drivingЉ sec- ● Your brake system may not be working belt is loose, broken or missing.
properly if the warning light is on. Driv-
tion.
ing could be dangerous. If you judge it Door open warning light
or Brake warning light to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest
service station for repairs. Otherwise, This light comes on when any of the doors are not
have your vehicle towed because driv- closed securely while the ignition key is in the ON
This light functions for both the parking brake and
ing it could be dangerous. position.
the foot brake systems.
● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-
Parking brake indicator gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
When the ignition key is in the ON position, the level may increase your stopping dis-
light comes on when the parking brake is applied. tance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably The low tire pressure warning light does not
Engine oil pressure warning
before the fuel gauge reaches E (Empty). There automatically turn off when the tire pressure is
light will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recom-
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the when the fuel gauge needle reaches E mended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at
light flickers or comes on during normal driving, (Empty). speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning
Low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other
authorized repair shop. light pressure.

The engine oil pressure warning light is not Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
pressure of all tires except the spare. driving” section and in the “In case of emergency”
dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in
section.
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
this manual. tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not TPMS malfunction:
functioning properly.
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
CAUTION After the ignition switch is placed in the ON tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-
Running the engine with the engine oil position, this light illuminates for about 1 second mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
pressure warning light on could cause se- and turns off. placed in the ON position. The light will remain on
rious damage to the engine almost imme- after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a
Low tire pressure warning:
diately. Such damage is not covered by NISSAN dealer.
warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pres-
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
is safe to do so. sure, the warning light will illuminate. If you select
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
the tire pressure information in the display (if so
Low fuel warning light driving” section.
equipped), the LOW PRESSURE warning mes-
sage will be displayed. The tire pressure for each
tire will also be displayed. WARNING
This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel
tank is getting low. The low fuel warning chime When the low tire pressure warning light illumi- ● If the light does not illuminate with the
will also sound under certain conditions. See nates, you should stop and adjust the tire pres- ignition switch in the ON position, have
“Low fuel warning chime” later in this section. sure to the recommended COLD tire pressure the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. as soon as possible.


06/29/07—cathy ੭

● If the light illuminates while driving, ● Replacing tires with those not originally is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or specified by NISSAN could affect the for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, proper operation of the TPMS. is securely fastened.
pull off the road to a safe location and The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if
stop the vehicle as soon as possible. CAUTION the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened
Driving with under-inflated tires may when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For
permanently damage the tires and in- ● The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to 7 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON
crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-
check the tire pressure regularly. position, the system does not activate the warn-
rious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could re- ing light for the front passenger.
● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
sult in serious personal injury. Check of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust TPMS may not operate correctly. belts and supplemental restraint system” section
the tire pressure to the recommended for precautions on seat belt usage.
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire ● Be sure to install the specified size of
and Loading Information label to turn tires to the 4 wheels correctly. Supplemental air bag warning
the low tire pressure warning light OFF. light
If the light still comes on while driving
Low windshield washer fluid
after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire warning light When the ignition key is in the ON or START
may be flat. If you have a flat tire, reposition, the supplemental air bag warning light
This light comes on when the windshield washer
place it with a spare tire as soon as illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
fluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluid
possible. off. This means the system is operational.
as necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this If any of the following conditions occur, the front
is replaced, tire pressure will not be manual. air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-
indicated, the TPMS will not function sioner systems need servicing and your vehicle
and the low tire pressure warning light Seat belt warning light and must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:
will flash for approximately 1 minute. chime
The light will remain on after 1 minute. ● The supplemental air bag warning light re-
The light and chime remind you to fasten your mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
possible for tire replacement and/or
ignition key is turned to the ON or START position ● The supplemental air bag warning light
system resetting.
and remains illuminated until the driver’s seat belt flashes intermittently.

06/29/07—cathy ੭

● The supplemental air bag warning light does Cruise main switch indicator High beam indicator light
not come on at all.
light (blue)
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental
restraint systems (air bag system) and/or the The light comes on when the cruise control main This blue light comes on when the headlight high
pretensioners may not function properly. For ad- switch is pushed. The light goes out when the beams are on and goes out when the low beams
ditional details see “Supplemental restraint sys- main switch is pushed again. When the cruise are selected.
tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise
The high beam indicator light also comes on
supplemental restraint system” section of this control system is operational.
when the passing signal is activated.
manual. Cruise set switch indicator Malfunction Indicator Light
light (MIL)
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light The light comes on while the vehicle speed is
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks
is on, it could mean that the front air bags, controlled by the cruise control system. If the light
while the engine is running, it may indicate a
side air bags, curtain air bags and/or pre- blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate
potential emission control malfunction.
tensioners will not operate in an accident. the cruise control system is not functioning prop-
To help avoid injury to yourself or others, erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come
have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer. on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,
dealer as soon as possible. or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make
Front passenger air bag sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
INDICATOR LIGHTS status light tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons
(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
Automatic transmission The front passenger air bag status light ( )
will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be After a few driving trips, the light should
position indicator light turn off if no other potential emission control
OFF depending on how the front passenger seat
When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- is being used. system malfunction exists.
tion, the indicator in the tachometer shows the If this indicator light comes on steady for 20
For front passenger air bag status light operation,
automatic transmission selector lever position. seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when
see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in
See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and the engine is not running, it indicates that the
the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
driving” section of this manual. vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-
restraint system” section of this manual.
tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-

06/29/07—debbie ੭

ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the – if possible, reduce the amount of cargo Security indicator light
“Technical and consumer information” section of being hauled or towed.
this manual. This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in
The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking
Operation and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function
by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have indicates the security system equipped on the
The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in vehicle is operational.
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
one of two ways:
For additional information, see “Security sys-
● Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — An CAUTION tems” later in this section.
emission control system malfunction has Continued vehicle operation without hav-
been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If ing the emission control system checked Slip indicator light
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten and repaired as necessary could lead to
or install the cap and continue to drive the poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, This indicator light will blink when the traction
vehicle. The light should turn off after and possible damage to the emission con- control system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery
a few driving trips. If the light does not trol system. road conditions may exist if the slip indicator
turn off after a few driving trips, have the blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving
vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You Overdrive off indicator light accordingly.
do not need to have your vehicle towed to
The slip indicator light also comes on when you
the dealer. This light comes on when the overdrive function turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light
● Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — An is OFF. will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is
engine misfire has been detected which may The automatic transmission overdrive function is operational. If the light does not come on or does
damage the emission control system. To re- controlled by the overdrive switch. not go off, have the traction control system
duce or avoid emission control system dam- checked by a NISSAN dealer.
age: See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual. Traction Control System off
– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH indicator light (if so equipped)
(72 km/h).
This indicator light comes on when the traction
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indi-
cates the Traction Control System is not operat-
– avoid steep uphill grades. ing.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

Push the traction control off switch again or re- Vehicle Dynamic Control off AUDIBLE REMINDERS
start the engine and the system will operate nor- indicator light (if so equipped) Brake pad wear warning
mally. See “Traction Control System (TCS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual. This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.
Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
The traction control light also comes on when you This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control sys- makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light tem is not operating. vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
will turn off after about 2 seconds if the Traction pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
Control System (TCS) is operational. If the light Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch
soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.
again or restart the engine and the system will
stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica-
tor light while you are driving, have the Traction
operate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control Key reminder chime
(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
Control System checked by a NISSAN dealer. tion of this manual. A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
While the Traction Control System is operating, while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove
The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on the key and take it with you when leaving the
you might feel slight vibration or hear the system when you turn the ignition key to the ON position. vehicle.
working when starting the vehicle or accelerat- The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the
ing, but this is normal. system is operational. If the light stays on or Light reminder chime
comes on along with the SLIP indicator light
Turn signal/hazard indicator while you are driving, have the Vehicle Dynamic
With the ignition switch in the OFF position, a
lights chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened if
Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
the headlights or parking lights are on.
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-
switch is activated. operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear
ing the vehicle.
the system working when starting the vehicle or
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned
accelerating, but this is normal.
on.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

SECURITY SYSTEMS

brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition, twice and the horn beeps once as a re-
and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be minder that the doors are already locked.
aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,
The horn may or may not beep. For vehicles
well-lit areas whenever possible.
with monochrome screen, refer to “Silenc-
Many devices offering additional protection, such ing the horn beep feature” in the “Pre-driving
as component locks, identification markers, and checks and adjustments” section later in this
tracking systems, are available at auto supply manual. For vehicles with color screen, refer
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer to “Vehicle electronic systems” in the “Dis-
may also offer such equipment. Check with your play screen, heater, air conditioner, audio
insurance company to see if you may be eligible and phone systems” section later in this
for discounts for various theft protection features. manual.
How to arm the vehicle security 4. Confirm that the indicator light comes
system on. The light stays on for about 30
WIC0834
seconds. The vehicle security system is now
Your vehicle has two types of security systems: 1. Close all windows. (The system can be pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve-
● Vehicle security system armed even if the windows are open.) hicle security system automatically shifts
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. into the armed phase. The light begins
● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the
3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors 30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’s
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM can be locked with the key, power door lock door is unlocked by the key or the keyfob, or
The vehicle security system provides visual and switch or with the keyfob. the ignition key is turned to ACC or ON, the
audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors system will not arm.
Keyfob operation:
when the system is armed. It is not, however, a
● If the key is turned slowly when locking
motion detection type system that activates when ● Push the button on the keyfob.
the driver’s door, the system may not
a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs. All doors lock. The hazard lights flash
arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned
twice and the horn beeps once to indicate
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot beyond the vertical position toward the
all doors are locked.
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or unlock position to remove the key, the
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al- ● When the button is pushed with system may be disarmed when the key
ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a all doors locked, the hazard lights flash is removed. If the indicator light fails to

06/29/07—debbie ੭

glow for 30 seconds, unlock the driv- How to stop an activated alarm If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
er’s door once and lock it again. ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s rate key ring to avoid interference from other
● Even when the driver and/or passen- door with the key, or by pressing the but- devices.
gers are in the vehicle, the system will ton on the keyfob.
arm with all doors closed and locked Statement related to Section 15 of FCC
with the ignition key in the OFF posi- NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tion. SYSTEM tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT
ASSY — IMMOBILIZER)
Vehicle security system activation The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
This device complies with part 15 of the
allow the engine to start without the use of a
The vehicle security system will give the following FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
registered key. Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-
alarm:
If the engine fails to start using a registered key ing two conditions;
● The headlights blink and the horn sounds (for example, when interference is caused by
intermittently. (1) This device may not cause harmful in-
another registered key, an automated toll road terference, and (2) this device must accept
● The alarm automatically turns off after ap- device or automatic payment device on the key any interference received, including inter-
proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm ring), restart the engine using the following pro- ference that may cause undesired opera-
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with cedures: tion of the device.
again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-
the driver’s door with the key, or by pressing for approximately 5 seconds. PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-
the button on the keyfob. SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-
The alarm is activated by: position, and wait approximately 10 sec- ATE THE EQUIPMENT.
● opening a door without using the key or onds.
keyfob (even if the door is unlocked by using 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
the inside lock knob or the power door lock
switch). 4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH

NOTE:
You can turn on or turn off the driving
speed dependent intermittent wiper func-
tion for vehicles with color display screen.
Refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” in the
“Display screen, heater, air conditioner, au-
dio and phone systems” section later in this
manual.
᭺
2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation
᭺
3 High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-
tion
Push the lever up ᭺ to have one sweep opera-
4
LIC0474 WIC0843 tion (MIST) of the wiper.
Security indicator light SWITCH OPERATION Pull the lever toward you ᭺ to operate the
5
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
The security indicator light blinks whenever the The windshield wiper and washer operates when
ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC the ignition switch is in the ON position. WARNING
position. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-
hicle Immobilizer System is operational. Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
following speed: tion may freeze on the windshield and
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal- obscure your vision which may lead to an
functioning, the light will remain on while the ᭺
1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation
accident. Warm the windshield with the
ignition key is in the ON position. can be adjusted by turning the knob toward
defroster before you wash the windshield.
If the light still remains on and/or the en-
᭺ (Slower) or ᭺ (Faster). Also, the inter-
A B
mittent operation speed varies in accor-
gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser- when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-
vice as soon as possible. Please bring all
tent operation speed will be faster.)
registered keys that you have when visiting
your NISSAN dealer for service.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH

CAUTION WARNING
● Do not operate the washer continu- In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
ously for more than 30 seconds. tion may freeze on the window and ob-
scure your vision. Warm the rear window
● Do not operate the washer if the reser-
with the defroster before you wash the
voir tank is empty.
rear window.
● Do not fill the window washer reservoir
tank with washer fluid concentrates at CAUTION
full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may ● Do not operate the washer continu-
permanently stain the grille if spilled ously for more than 30 seconds.
while filling the window washer reser- ● Do not operate the washer if the reser-
voir tank. voir tank is empty.
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with WIC0844 ● Do not fill the window washer reservoir
water to the manufacturer’s recom- The rear window wiper and washer operate when tank with washer fluid concentrates at
mended levels before pouring the fluid the ignition switch is in the ON position. full strength. Some methyl alcohol
into the window washer reservoir tank. based washer fluid concentrates may
Do not use the window washer reservoir Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position permanently stain the grille if spilled
tank to mix the washer fluid concen- to operate the wiper. while filling the window washer reser-
trate and water.
᭺
1 Intermittent (INT) – intermittent operation voir tank.
(not adjustable) ● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recom-
᭺
2 ON – continuous low speed operation
mended levels before pouring the fluid
Push the switch forward ᭺ to operate the
3 into the window washer reservoir tank.
washer. The wiper will also operate several times. Do not use the window washer reservoir
tank to mix the washer fluid concen-
trate and water.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
MIRROR (if so equipped) SWITCH
DEFROSTER SWITCH

WIC0934 WIC0935 LIC0560
Type A Type B Type A
To defrost the rear window glass and outside HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and
push the rear window defroster switch on. The Lighting
rear window defroster indicator light comes on.
Push the switch again to turn the defroster off. ᭺
1 When turning the switch to the posi-
tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and
The rear window defroster automatically turns off instrument panel lights come on.
after approximately 15 minutes.
᭺
2 When turning the switch to the posi-
CAUTION tion, the headlights come on and all the other
lights remain on.
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or dam-
age the rear window defroster.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

NOTE:
Autolight activation sensitivity and the
time delay for autolight shutoff is adjust-
able for vehicles with color display screen.
See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the
“Display screen, heater, air conditioner, au-
dio and phone systems” section later in this
manual.
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-
tion ᭺.
1

2. Turn the ignition key to ON.
LIC0687 LIC0561
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
Type B Autolight system (if so equipped) headlights on and off.
CAUTION The autolight system allows the headlights to be Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a
Use the headlights with the engine run- set so they turn on and off automatically. The door is opened and left open, the headlights
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle autolight system can: remain on for 5 minutes. During that 5 minutes:
battery. ● if all doors are closed, the headlights remain
● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights au- on for 45 seconds, then turn off.
tomatically when it is dark. ● if another door is opened, then the 5 minute
timer is reset.
● Turn off all the lights when it is light.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to
● Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after
the OFF, , or position.
you turn the key to OFF and all doors are
closed.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

After the headlights automatically turn off with the
headlight switch in the or position,
the headlights will illuminate again for 5 minutes if
the headlight switch is moved to the OFF position
and then turned to the or position.

CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature au-
tomatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the head-
light switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
LIC0954 LIC0390
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
Be sure you do not put anything on top of Headlight beam select (Canada only)
the autolight sensor ᭺ located on top of
1
the instrument panel. The autolight sensor ᭺
1 To select the high beam function, push the The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-
controls the autolight; if it is covered, the lever forward. The high beam lights come on duced intensity when the engine is started with
autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the light illuminates. the parking brake released. The daytime running
and the headlights will illuminate. If this lights operate with the headlight switch in the
occurs while parked with the engine off ᭺
2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.
OFF position or in the position. Turn the
and the key in the ON position, your vehi- ᭺
3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight switch to the position for full
cle’s battery could become discharged. headlight high beams on and off. illumination when driving at night.
Battery saver system If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-
If the ignition switch is turned OFF while the nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
headlight switch is in the or posi- the parking brake is released. The daytime run-
tion, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes. ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch
is turned off.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

The instrument brightness control will not adjust
WARNING
the brightness when the headlights or parking
When the daytime running light system is lights are off.
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not
on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
an accident injuring yourself and others.

LIC0936

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
The instrument brightness control operates when
the headlight control switch is in
the , or AUTO position (with auto-
lights activated).
Turn the control ᭺ to adjust the brightness of the
1
instrument panel lights when driving at night. The
brightness indicator ᭺ will illuminate in the
2
odometer when the control is turned. The indica-
tor will turn off a few seconds after the control is
released.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

The headlights must be on and the low beams
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog
lights automatically turn off when the high beam
headlights are selected.

LIC0563 LIC0393
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
Turn signal To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch
to the position, then turn the fog light
᭺
1 Move the lever up or down to signal the switch to the position.
turning direction. When the turn is com-
pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically. To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch
in the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head-
Lane change signal lights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to
the position.
᭺
2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up or
down to the point where the indicator light To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch. to the OFF position.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.

AIC0102 LIC0394
CORNERING LIGHT Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency condi-
The cornering light provides additional illumina- tions. All turn signal lights flash.
tion toward the turning direction. The cornering
light will illuminate on the turning direction side WARNING
when a turn is signaled with the headlights on.
● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
● Turn signals do not work when the haz-
ard warning flasher lights are on.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

HORN HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)

3. When the seat is warmed or before you leave
the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.

CAUTION
● Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the seat.
● Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-
ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
may become overheated.
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
LIC0395 WIC0905 heater.
To sound the horn, push the center pad area of
The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters (if ● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
the steering wheel.
so equipped). The switches are located at the should be removed immediately with a
sides of the seats. dry cloth.
WARNING
● When cleaning the seat, never use
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so 1. Start the engine.
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-
could affect proper operation of the lar materials.
2. Push the (low) or (high) posi-
supplemental front air bag system. Tam-
tion of the switch, as desired, depending on ● If any abnormalities are found or the
pering with the supplemental front air bag
system may result in serious personal the temperature. The indicator light in the heated seat does not operate, turn the
injury. switch will illuminate. switch off and have the system checked
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, by your NISSAN dealer.
automatically turning the heater on and off. ● The battery could run down if the seat
The indicator light will remain on as long as heater is operated while the engine is
the switch is on. not running.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
OFF SWITCH (if so equipped) OFF SWITCH (if so equipped) (if so equipped)

LIC0451 WIC0534 LIC0471
The vehicle should be driven with the Traction The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle WARNING
Control System (TCS) on for most driving condi- Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-
tions. ing conditions. The rear sonar system is a convenience
but it is not a substitute for proper back-
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the TCS If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC ing. Always turn and check that it is safe to
reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. system reduces the engine output to reduce do so before backing up. Always back up
The engine speed will be reduced even if the wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced slowly.
accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If
engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck The rear sonar system (if so equipped) is active
turn the TCS off. vehicle, turn the VDC system off. when the ignition is in the ON position and the
shift selector lever is in R (Reverse).
To turn off the TCS, push the TCS OFF switch. To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
The indicator will come on. switch. The indicator will come on. When sensors detect obstacles within 6 ft (1.8
m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is emitted.
Push the TCS OFF switch again or restart the en- Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine
gine to turn ON the system. See “Traction Control to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control
System (TCS)” in the “Starting and driving” section. (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

POWER OUTLET

The rear sonar system can be disabled by push-
ing the OFF switch. When the system is disabled,
the indicator light on the switch will illuminate.
The system will automatically reset the next time
the ignition switch is turned on.
See “Rear sonar system” in the “Starting and
driving” section.

LIC0937 WIC0938
1st row 2nd row
The power outlets are for powering electrical
CAUTION
accessories such as cellular telephones.
● The outlet and plug may be hot during
The power outlets located in the 1st and 2nd or immediately after use.
rows are powered only when the ignition key is in
the ACC or ON position. ● This power outlet is not designed for
use with a cigarette lighter unit.
The power outlet located in the cargo area is
powered directly by the vehicle’s battery. ● Do not use with accessories that ex-
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
Open the cap to use a power outlet. Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
● Use power outlets with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

STORAGE

WIC0939 LIC0945 LIC0940
Cargo area SUNGLASSES HOLDER Below CD insert slot
(if so equipped)
● Avoid using power outlets when the air Pull the lid down to open the sunglasses holder.
conditioner, headlights or rear window INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE
defroster is on.
WARNING
● Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
being used is turned OFF. driving to prevent an accident.
● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may CAUTION
overheat or the internal temperature ● Do not use for anything other than
fuse may open. sunglasses.
● When not in use, be sure to close the ● Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses
cap. Do not allow water to contact the holder while parking in direct sunlight.
outlet. The heat may damage the sunglasses.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LIC0941 WIC1037 LIC0943
Below power outlets CONSOLE BOX (if so equipped) Pull up on the lever to access the front storage
bin on the console box.
Push the corresponding button ᭺ to open the
1
small storage compartments.
Press the front portion of the lid ᭺ down from the
2
handle area until it stops.
While keeping the downward force applied, push
the lid rearward ᭺ to the desired opening
3
amount. The CD/DVD tray is removable.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LIC0894 LIC0895
CENTER TRAY TABLE (if so To store the tray table, pull the lever located
equipped) beneath the tray table up ᭺ and gently lower the
A
tray table to its original position.
To use the center tray table, raise it up until it
locks into the upright position.
To access the small storage compartment on the
top of the tray table, raise the lid.

CAUTION
To avoid damaging it, do not apply a total
load of more than 50 lbs (23 kg) to the
center tray table.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LIC0944 WIC0946 LIC0520

GLOVE BOX Front door Sliding door
MAP POCKETS
Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the
master key when locking ᭺ or unlocking ᭺ the
1 2
glove box. The valet key cannot be used to lock or
unlock the glove box.

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LIC0503 LIC0504 WIC0878
SEATBACK POCKETS GROCERY HOOKS CARGO NET (if so equipped)
The seatback pockets are located on the back of The grocery hooks allow for standard size plastic The net located on the back of the driver’s seat
the driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pockets grocery bags to hang side by side. can be used to hold small objects.
can be used to store maps.
CAUTION WARNING
Do not apply a total load of more than 18 ● Do not place sharp objects in the net.
lbs (8 kg) to a single grocery hook. Such objects may become dangerous
projectiles and cause injury when the
vehicle is moving or if the vehicle is
involved in a collision.
● The cargo restrained in the net must not
exceed 18 lb (8 kg) or the net may not
stay secured.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WIC0959 LIC0512 LIC0955

OVERHEAD CONSOLE Small storage bin Type A
Front
Push the button to open the small storage bin.
WARNING
Push the lid up to close.
Keep storage bins closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a CUP HOLDERS
sudden stop.
Large storage bin CAUTION
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
Push the button to open the storage bin. the cup holder is being used to prevent
Push the lid up to close. spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard
objects can injure you in an accident.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LIC0896 LIC0509 WIC0947
Type B 2nd row 3rd row
To use the cup holders, raise the center tray table.
Refer to “Center tray table” earlier in this section.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

To access the cargo organizer:
1. Move both front seats as forward as pos-
sible. Refer to ЉSeatsЉ in the ЉSafety – seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-
temЉ section earlier in this manual.
2. Stow the center tray table (if so equipped).
Refer to “Center tray table” earlier in this
section.
3. Lift up the floor carpeting and the removable
floor board ᭺. A

LIC0521
Sliding door bottle holder
Soft bottle holder
CAUTION
● Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident. WIC0893

● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid CARGO ORGANIZER (if so
containers. equipped)


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WIC0948 LIC0514 WIC0831
3RD ROW ARMREST BIN CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN GARMENT HOOK
Raise the lid to open the 3rd row armrest bin. To open the cargo area storage bin, turn the knob To store garments, pull the garment hook down to
counterclockwise ᭺. The lid can be removed.
1 the use position.
To close, replace the lid and turn the knob clock-
wise ᭺.
2 CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than 55
lbs (25 kg) to the hook.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WINDOWS

WARNING POWER WINDOWS
● Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is WARNING
loaded at or near the cargo carrying
capacity, especially if the significant ● Make sure that all passengers have
portion of that load is carried on the their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
roof rack. it is in motion and before closing the
windows. Use the window lock switch
● Heavy loading of the roof rack has the to prevent unexpected use of the power
potential to affect the vehicle stability windows.
and handling during sudden or abnor-
mal handling maneuvers. ● Do not leave children unattended inside
● Roof rack load should be evenly tivate switches or controls and become
distributed. trapped in a window. Unattended chil-
WIC0949 ● Do not exceed maximum roof rack load dren could become involved in serious
ROOF RACK (if so equipped) weight capacity. accidents.
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roof
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
rack. Do not load more than 125 lb (56 kg). Be
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,
careful that your vehicle does not exceed the unsecured cargo could cause personal
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its injury.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and
rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the CAUTION
F.M.V.S.S. label (located on the driver’s door
pillar). For more information regarding GVWR Use care when placing or removing items
and GAWR, refer to “Vehicle loading information” from the roof rack. If you cannot comfort-
in the “Technical and consumer information” sec- ably lift the items onto the roof rack from
tion later in this manual. the ground, use a ladder or stool.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close all of the windows.
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is in the ON position, or for about 45
seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the
OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s door
is opened during this period of about 45 sec-
onds, power to the windows is canceled. To open
a window, push the switch and hold it down. To
close a window, pull the switch and hold it up. To
stop the opening or closing function at any time,
simply release the switch.
WIC0950 WIC0951
1. Window lock button Front passenger’s power window
2. Power door lock switch switch
3. Front passenger’s side automatic
The passenger’s window switch operates only
switch
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open
4. Right rear power vent window switch the window, push the switch and hold it down ᭺.
1
(if so equipped) To close the window, pull the switch up ᭺.2
5. Left rear power vent window switch
(if so equipped) Locking passengers’ windows
6. Driver’s side automatic switch When the window lock button is depressed, only
the driver’s side window can be opened or
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock
function.


06/29/07—cathy ੭

Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
a window is closed by automatic operation.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window oc-
curs.

WARNING
There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which
LIC0410 cannot be detected. Make sure that all LIC0523
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
Automatic operation the vehicle before closing the window. POWER VENT WINDOWS (if so
To fully open a window equipped with automatic
equipped)
If the control unit detects something caught in a
operation, press the window switch down (only window equipped with automatic operation as it Use the vent window switches on the driver’s
driver’s side shown) to the second detent and is closing, the window will be immediately low- side window controls to open and close the
release it; it need not be held. The window auto- ered. power vent windows.
matically opens all the way. To stop the window, To open a power vent window, press the switch
lift the switch up while the window is opening. down ᭺.
1
To fully close a window equipped with automatic To close the window, lift the switch up ᭺.
2
operation, pull the switch up to the second detent
and release it; it need not be held. To stop the
window, press the switch down while the window
is closing.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

SKYVIEW™ GLASS-PANELED ROOF
(if so equipped)

The power vent windows operate when the igni-
tion key is in the ON position, or for 45 seconds
after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position.
If the driver’s or passenger’s door is opened
during this 45 second period, power to the vent
windows is cancelled.

LIC0524 LIC0525
MANUAL VENT WINDOWS (if so To close the SkyView roof sunshade, pull the tab
equipped) to draw out the shade. Lock the shade in place by
positioning the rod on the holder.
To open a manual vent window, pull the latch
handle toward you until it releases. To open the shade, lift the rod from the holder and
ease the shade back into its stored position.
To lock the window in the open position, push the
latch handle rearward until it locks. CAUTION
To close a manual vent window, pull the latch Do not pull the SkyView roof sunshade
handle toward you and push the rear portion of straight down. This can damage the
the latch toward the rear of the vehicle until it shade.
locks.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

To fully close the moonroof, push the switch Auto reverse function (when closing or
toward the close position ᭺.
4
tilting down the moonroof)
To open or close the moonroof part way, push the The auto reverse function can be activated when
switch in any direction ᭺ while the roof is sliding
5
the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-
open or closed to stop it in the desired position. matic operation when the ignition key is in the ON
Tilting the moonroof position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition
key is turned to the OFF position.
To tilt the moonroof up, push the tilt switch to-
Depending on the environment or driving
ward the up position ᭺. When the moonroof is
1
conditions, the auto reverse function may
open, it will automatically close and then tilt up. be activated if an impact or load similar to
To tilt the moonroof down, push the tilt switch something being caught in the moonroof
toward the down position ᭺.
2 occurs.
WIC0812
Resetting the moonroof sliding switch WARNING
AUTOMATIC MOONROOF The sliding switch will become inoperable after There are some small distances immedi-
The moonroof will only operate when the ignition the battery terminal is disconnected, the electri- ately before the closed position which
switch is in the ON position. The automatic cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormality cannot be detected. Make sure that all
moonroof is operational for about 45 seconds, detected. Use the following reset procedure to passengers have their hands, etc., inside
even if the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or return moonroof operation to normal. the vehicle before closing the moonroof.
OFF position. If the driver’s door or the front When closing:
1. If the moonroof lid is open, push the tilting
passenger’s door is opened during this period of
switch repeatedly toward the down position If the control unit detects something caught in the
about 45 seconds, power to the moonroof is
canceled. ᭺ to fully close the lid.
2 moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof
2. Push and hold the tilting switch for more will immediately open backward.
Sliding the moonroof than 2 seconds toward the down position When tilting down:
To fully open the moonroof, push the switch to- ᭺ to reestablish the lid’s home position.
2
If the control unit detects something caught in the
ward the open position ᭺.
3 The moonroof should now operate normally. moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-
mediately tilt up.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

LIGHTS ON DEMAND SWITCH

If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re- If the moonroof does not close
peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep
pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the
after it happens; the moonroof will fully close moonroof.
gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the
moonroof.

WARNING
● In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out of LIC0472
the moonroof opening while the vehicle The lights on demand switch allows the driver to
is in motion or while the moonroof is select one of three lighting modes for the interior
closing. lights. The lights on demand switch operates
regardless of ignition switch position.
CAUTION
: The interior lights illuminate. The lights will
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand turn off automatically after 30 minutes to prevent
from the moonroof before opening. the battery from becoming discharged.
● Do not place heavy objects on the
OFF: The interior lights do not illuminate.
moonroof or surrounding area.
: The interior lights illuminate when a door
Sunshade is opened.
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for- If the lights on demand switch is in the
ward or backward. position, the lights will stay on for about 30 sec-
onds when:

06/29/07—debbie ੭

PERSONAL LIGHTS

● The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key NOTE:
or the power door lock switch while all doors
The footwell and door step lights illuminate
are closed and the ignition switch is in the when the driver and passenger doors are
OFF position. open regardless of the lights on demand
● The driver’s door is opened and then closed switch position. These lights will turn off
while the key is removed from the ignition automatically after 30 minutes while doors
switch. are open to prevent the battery from be-
coming discharged.
● The key is removed from the ignition switch
while all doors are closed. CAUTION
The interior lights will turn off while the 30 second Do not use for extended periods of time
timer is activated when: with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
● The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, a LIC0492
key, or the power door lock switch.
Type A
● The ignition switch is turned ON.
The rear seating positions have personal lights
The lights will turn off automatically after 30 min- located on the headliner or on the overhead con-
utes while doors are open to prevent the battery sole. There is also a light above the cargo area on
from becoming discharged. the overhead trim.
To operate a personal light located on the head-
liner (Type A), push the light.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

MAP LIGHTS

LIC0493 LIC0492 WIC0952
Type B Type C To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To
The personal lights on the overhead console The cargo light on the overhead trim (Type C) has turn them off, press the switches again.
(Type B) can be swiveled 360 degrees. To turn on a three-position switch. To operate, push the
the light, press the button. Press the button again light. CAUTION
to turn off the light.
On: The light is illuminated Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
Normal: The light illuminates when any door is
in a discharged battery.
opened or unlocked by the keyfob. The light turns
off after 30 seconds or when all doors are closed.
Off: The light does not illluminate, regardless of
door position or lock status.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

HOMELINKா UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver provides a
WARNING
convenient way to consolidate the functions of up
to three individual hand-held transmitters into ● Do not use the HomeLinkா Universal
one built-in device. Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and re-
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver: verse features as required by federal
● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) safety standards. (These standards be-
devices such as garage doors, gates, home came effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-
and office lighting, entry door locks and se-
rage door opener which cannot detect
curity systems.
an object in the path of a closing garage
● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No door and then automatically stop and
separate batteries are required. If the vehi- reverse, does not meet current federal
cle’s battery is discharged or is discon- safety standards. Using a garage door
LIC0956 nected, HomeLinkா will retain all program- opener without these features in-
ming. creases the risk of serious injury or
CONSOLE LIGHT death.
The console light ᭺ will turn on whenever the
1 Once the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver
● During the programming procedure
parking lights or headlights are illuminated. is programmed, retain the original trans-
your garage door or security gate will
mitter for future programming procedures
The console light brightness can be adjusted (if open and close (if the transmitter is
(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon within range). Make sure that people or
so equipped) with the illumination brightness sale of the vehicle, the programmed
control. objects are clear of the garage door,
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver buttons gate, etc. that you are programming.
should be erased for security purposes. For
additional information refer to “Program- ● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned
ming HomeLinkா” later in this section. off while programming the HomeLinkா
Universal Transceiver.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator
light on the HomeLinkா flashes, changing
from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing
blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.
When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both
buttons may be released. The rapidly flash-
ing light indicates successful programming.
To activate the garage door or other pro-
grammed device, press and hold the pro-
grammed HomeLinkா button — releasing
when the device begins to activate.
5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkா blinks
rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,
WIC0986 WIC0987 HomeLinkா has picked up a “rolling code”
PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா 3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and garage door opener signal. You will need to
hold both the HomeLinkா button you want to proceed with the next steps to train the
1. To begin, press and hold the two outer program and the hand-held transmitter but- HomeLinkா to complete the programming
HomeLinkா buttons (to clear the memory) which may require a ladder and another per-
ton.
until the indicator light ᭺ blinks (after 20
1 son for convenience.
seconds). Release both buttons. DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has
been completed. 6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-
2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter gram button located on the garage door
1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the opener’s motor to activate the “training
HomeLinkா surface.
mode”. This button is usually located near
the antenna wire that hangs down from the
motor. If the wire originates from under a
light lens, you will need to remove the lens to
access the program button.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

NOTE: PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா FOR PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-
Once you have pressed and released the CANADIAN CUSTOMERS DIAGNOSIS
program button on the garage door open- Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand- If the HomeLinkா does not quickly learn the hand-
er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec- held transmitter information:
have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7. onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to
Use the help of a second person for conve- ● replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
HomeLinkா, continue to press and hold the
nience to assist when performing this step. with new batteries.
HomeLinkா button (note steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-
7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas- gramming HomeLinkா”) while you press and re- ● position the hand-held transmitter with its
ing the garage door opener program button, press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every battery area facing away from the
quickly and firmly press and release the 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly HomeLinkா surface.
HomeLinkா button you’ve just programmed. (indicating successful programming).
● press and hold both the HomeLinkா and
Press and release the HomeLinkா button up
NOTE: hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-
to 3 times to complete the training.
ruption.
8. Your HomeLinkா button should now be pro- When programming a garage door opener,
etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur- ● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3
grammed. (To program the remaining
ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos- inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
HomeLinkா buttons for additional door or
sible damage to the garage door opener HomeLinkா surface. Hold the transmitter in
gate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)
components. that position for up to 15 seconds. If
HomeLinkா is not programmed within that
NOTE:
OPERATING THE HOMELINKா time, try holding the transmitter in another
Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER position – keeping the indicator light in view
“clear” all previously programmed at all times.
HomeLinkா buttons. The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver (once pro-
grammed) may now be used to activate the ga- If you continue to have programming difficulties,
If you have any questions or are having difficulty rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap- please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs
programming your HomeLinkா buttons, refer to propriate programmed HomeLinkா Universal Department. The phone numbers are located in
the HomeLinkா web site at: www.homelink.com Transceiver button. The red indicator light will the Foreword of this manual.
or call 1-800-355-3515. illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver button has This transmitter has been tested and com-
INFORMATION now been reprogrammed. The new device can plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
be activated by pushing the HomeLinkா button Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, that was just programmed. This procedure will proved by the party responsible for compli-
to clear all programming, press and hold the two not affect any other programmed HomeLinkா ance could void the user’s authority to op-
outside buttons and release when the indicator buttons. erate the equipment.
light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).
DOC: ISTC 1763K1313
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE FCC I.D. CV2V67690
HOMELINKா BUTTON If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the
codes of any non-rolling code device that has
To reprogram a HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver been programmed into HomeLinkா. Consult the
button, complete the following. Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkா but- facturer or dealer of those devices for additional
ton. Do not release the button until step 4 information.
has been completed.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
2. When the indicator light begins to flash need to reprogram the HomeLinkா Univer-
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the sal Transceiver with your new transmitter
hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 information.
mm) away from the HomeLinkா surface.
FCC Notice:
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter
button. This device complies with FCC rules part 15
and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-
4. The HomeLinkா indicator light will flash, first tion is subject to the following two condi-
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator tions:
light begins to flash rapidly, release both
buttons. (1) This device may not cause harmful in-
terference and (2) This device must accept
any interference that may be received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

MEMO


3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Operating the power lift gate
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system keys . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Operating the manual sliding door Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Using the main ON/OFF switch for the Pedal position adjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
power sliding door (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Operating the power sliding door Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Child safety sliding door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . 3-10 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Operating the manual lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Using the main ON/OFF switch for the Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
power lift gate (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

06/29/07—debbie ੭

KEYS

A key number is only necessary when you have cause the registration process will erase the
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate memory of all key codes previously registered
from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.
can duplicate it. After the registration process, these components
will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.
SYSTEM KEYS Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time
of registration will no longer be able to start your
You can only drive your vehicle using the master vehicle.
or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which
vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in contains an electrical transponder, to come into
contact with salt water. This could affect system
the key head.
function.
The master key can be used for all the locks.
WPD0128
1. Two master keys (black) with transpon- The valet key cannot be used for the glove box
lock.
der chip and chrome NISSAN brand
symbol on one side To protect belongings when you leave a key with
2. Valet key (black) with transponder chip someone, give them the valet key only.
3. Key number plate Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
4. Transponder chip
Additional or replacement keys:
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place If you still have a key, the key number is not
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-
using the key number. NISSAN does not record cate your existing key. As many as five NISSAN
key numbers so it is very important to keep track Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used
of your key number plate. with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to
your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

06/29/07—debbie ੭

DOORS

WARNING CAUTION
● Always have the doors locked while ● Always use the door handle to open or
driving. Along with the use of seat belts, close a sliding door. Do not attempt to
this provides greater safety in the event open or close the doors by merely plac-
of an accident by helping to prevent ing your hand on the door edge or door
persons from being thrown from the slide roller, as this may cause injury.
vehicle. This also helps keep children
● When opening a sliding door on a slope,
and others from unintentionally open-
ensure that it is fully open and that it
ing the doors, and will help keep out
does not close by itself.
intruders.
● Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
● Do not leave children unattended inside LPD0181
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- Driver’s side
children could become involved in seri- LOCKING WITH KEY
ous accidents. The power door lock system allows you to lock or
● Always be sure that hands and feet are unlock all doors at the same time.
clear of the door frame to avoid injury
while closing a sliding door. Turning the key toward the front ᭺ of the vehicle
1
locks all doors.
Turning the key one time toward the rear ᭺ of the
2
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,
returning the key to neutral ᭺ (where the key can
3
only be removed and inserted) and turning it
toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks
all doors ᭺.
4

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

06/29/07—debbie ੭

Opening and closing windows
The driver’s door key operation allows you to
open and close windows equipped with auto-
matic operation at the same time.
● To open the windows, turn the driver’s door
key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is unlocked.
● To close the windows, turn the driver’s door
key to the front of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is locked.
Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.
LPD0208 LPD0224
Inside lock for front doors Inside lock for sliding doors
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB
To lock the door without the key, move the inside
lock knob to the lock position ᭺, then close the
1
door.
To unlock the door without the key, move the
inside lock knob to the unlock position ᭺.
2


06/29/07—debbie ੭

Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver’s or
front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock
position with the key in the ignition and any door
open, all doors will lock and then unlock auto-
matically. This helps to prevent the keys from
being accidently locked inside the vehicle.

WPD0381 LPD0233
Door lock switch OPERATING THE MANUAL SLIDING
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR DOOR (if so equipped)
LOCK SWITCH The manual sliding door can be opened from the
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door inside or the outside.
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side), to To open a sliding door from the inside, push the
the lock position ᭺. When locking the door this
1 button ᭺ and pull the handle toward the rear of
1
way, be certain not to leave the key inside the the vehicle.
vehicle.
To open a sliding door from the outside, pull out
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the the outside handle.
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
The driver side sliding door cannot be opened
side) to the unlock position ᭺.
2
fully when the fuel-filler door is open.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

When the switch is in the OFF position, the
sliding door can still be opened with the keyfob or
overhead console switch. The sliding door can
also be opened manually with the inside or out-
side handle.

NOTE:
If the child safety lock is in the lock posi-
tion, the door pillar switch will not operate
the sliding door regardless of the main
ON/OFF switch position.

WPD0334 LPD0225

USING THE MAIN ON/OFF SWITCH Door pillar switch
FOR THE POWER SLIDING DOOR OPERATING THE POWER SLIDING
(if so equipped) DOOR (if so equipped)
The main ON/OFF switch is located in the over- NOTE:
head console.
To open, close or reverse a power sliding
Push the switch ON to enable the door pillar door, the ignition switch must be OFF, or, if
switches and the power assist feature. An indica- the ignition switch is ON, the shift selector
tor light will illuminate when the switch is in the lever must be in P (Park). Also, the power
ON position. sliding doors will not operate if battery
voltage is low.
Push the switch OFF to disable the door pillar
switches and the power assist feature. An indica-
tor light will illuminate when the switch is in the
OFF position.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

● A sliding door can be opened by the over- feature can be activated by the switches on the
head console switch and the keyfob even if keyfob, the overhead console and the door pillar.
the vehicle is locked. The door will individu-
● If the inside or outside handle is activated
ally unlock and open. When the sliding door
while the cinching motor is engaged, the
is closed, it will remain unlocked. The vehicle
cinching motor will disengage and release
must be re-locked to lock the door.
the latch.
● The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec-
● The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec-
ond before the door opens.
ond before the door closes.
● The switch on the door pillar can only be
● The switch on the door pillar can only be
used to open the door if the main ON/OFF
used to close the door if the main ON/OFF
switch is ON, the door is unlocked and the
switch is ON.
child lockout switch is not set.
Reverse:
WPD0335 A warning chime will sound if the shift selector
The door will reverse direction immediately dur-
Overhead console switch lever is moved out of P (Park) during a power
ing power open or power close if the keyfob,
Power Assist: open operation.
overhead console or door pillar switch is
If the main on/off switch is ON and a sliding door The driver’s side power sliding door cannot be pressed. A chime will sound to announce the
is unlocked and manually moved toward the open power opened when the fuel lid door is open. A reversal.
or close position using the inside or outside warning chime will sound if an open operation is
handle, the power assist feature will be activated Auto Reverse:
attempted. The door can be opened manually
and the door will complete its motion automati- If an obstacle is detected during power open or
part way.
cally. power close, a warning chime will sound and the
Power Close: door will reverse direction and return to the full
Power Open: The door automatically moves from the fully open open or full close position. If a second obstacle is
The door automatically moves from the fully position to the secondary position. When the detected, the door motion will stop and the clutch
closed position to the fully open position in ap- sliding door reaches the secondary position, the mode will be engaged.
proximately 3 – 6 seconds. The power open cinching motor engages and pulls the door to its
feature can be activated by the switches on the primary latch position. Power close takes ap-
keyfob, the overhead console and the door pillar. proximately 4 – 7 seconds. The power close


06/29/07—debbie ੭

4. Press and hold the power sliding door
WARNING
switch on the overhead console until the
There are some small distances immedi- door closes.
ately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all 5. Release the switch.
passengers have their hands, etc., inside 6. Press and hold the power sliding door
the vehicle before closing the door. switch on the overhead console until the
door opens as far as it can.
Clutch Mode:
To help prevent unexpected slams due to gravity, 7. Release the switch.
the clutch mode is engaged intermittently for 8. Press and hold the power sliding door
approximately 5 – 8 seconds when power open switch on the overhead console until the
or close is interrupted due to multiple obstacles, door closes.
low battery voltage or the main ON/OFF switch
turned to OFF. The door must then be opened or 9. Release the switch.
closed manually. The power sliding door should now work prop-
erly.
Restarting the power sliding door
Some power sliding door functions will become NOTE:
disabled after the battery terminal is discon- The restarting procedure must be com-
nected and/or the electrical supply is interrupted. pleted for both the left-hand and right-
hand power sliding doors (if so equipped).
The following procedure must be used to restart
each power sliding door so that all functions are
enabled.
1. Turn the main on/off switch to OFF.
2. Manually open the power sliding door to its
fully open position.
3. Turn the main on/off switch to ON.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn on the
interior lights and puddle lamps (if so equipped),
and activate the panic alarm by using the keyfob
from outside the vehicle.
Some settings for the keyfob, such as horn beep,
can be adjusted. For vehicles with monochrome
screen, refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature”
later in this section. For vehicles with color
screen, refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” in
the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio
and phone systems” section later in this manual.
Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle
before locking the doors.
The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi-
mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective
distance depends upon the conditions around
the vehicle.
As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one
vehicle. For information concerning the purchase
and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
WPD0437
The keyfob will not function when:
CHILD SAFETY SLIDING DOOR The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the sliding doors. ● the battery is discharged
LOCK
When the lever is in the lock position, the ● the distance between the vehicle and the
The child safety lock helps prevent the sliding keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m)
door can be opened only from the outside,
door from being opened accidentally, especially
by the overhead console switch or using The panic alarm will not activate when the
when small children are in the vehicle.
the keyfob. key is in the ignition switch.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

● When the button is pushed with all
CAUTION
doors locked, the hazard warning lights flash
Listed below are conditions or occur- twice and the horn beeps once as a re-
rences which will damage the keyfob: minder that the doors are already locked.
● Do not allow the keyfob to become wet. ● If a door is open and you push the
● Do not drop the keyfob. button, the doors will lock but the horn will
not beep and the hazard warning lights will
● Do not strike the keyfob sharply against not flash.
another object.
The horn may or may not beep. For vehicles with
● Do not place the keyfob for an extended monochrome screen, refer to “Silencing the horn
period in an area where temperatures beep feature” later in this section. For vehicles
exceed 140°F (60°C). with color screen, refer to “Vehicle electronic
If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec- systems” in the “Display screen, heater, air con-
ommends erasing the ID code of that key- LPD0209 ditioner, audio and phone systems” section later
fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un- in this manual.
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
authorized use to unlock the vehicle. For
information regarding the erasing proce-
ENTRY SYSTEM NOTE:
dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer. Locking doors If you use the keyfob to change the horn
beep and lamp flash feature for vehicles
1. Close all windows. with color screen, the display will not show
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. the current mode and cannot be used to
change the mode. Use the keyfob to return
3. Close the hood and all doors. to the previous mode and re-enable the
4. Push the button on the keyfob. All display screen control. Refer to “Vehicle
the doors lock. The hazard warning lights electronic systems” in the “Display screen,
flash twice and the horn beeps once to heater, air conditioner, audio and phone
indicate all doors are locked. systems” section for additional informa-
tion.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

Push the button on the keyfob again within Opening windows
5 seconds.
The keyfob allows you to open windows
● All doors unlock. equipped with automatic operation simulta-
● The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors neously.
are completely closed. ● To open the windows, press the but-
The interior lights and puddle lamps (if so ton on the keyfob for longer than 3 sec-
equipped) can be turned off without waiting 30 onds after all doors are unlocked.
seconds by inserting the key into the ignition and The door windows will open while pressing
turning to the ON or START position, locking the the button on the keyfob.
doors with the keyfob or pushing the interior light
switch to the OFF position. The door windows cannot be closed by
using the keyfob.
Auto relock
LPD0210 Linking the keyfob to automatic drive
When the button on the keyfob is pushed, positioner memory
Unlocking doors all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute
unless one of the following operations is per- If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive
Push the button on the keyfob once.
formed: positioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memory
● Only the driver’s door unlocks. setting.
● Any door is opened.
● The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors See “Automatic drive positioner” later in this sec-
● A key is inserted into the ignition switch and tion.
are completely closed with the ignition key in the key is turned from OFF to ON.
any position except the ON position.
● The interior lights and puddle lamps (if so
equipped) turn on and the light timer acti-
vates for 30 seconds when the lights on
demand switch is in the position with
the ignition key in any position except the
ON position.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WPD0336 WPD0337 LPD0211
Operating the power sliding door (if so Operating the power lift gate (if so Using the panic alarm
equipped) equipped) If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
Push and hold the button on the keyfob for about Push and hold the button on the keyfob for about you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
0.5 second to open or close the power sliding 0.5 second to open or close the lift gate. The by pushing and holding the button on the
door. hazard warning lights flash and a chime sounds keyfob for longer than 0.5 second.
to indicate the power open or power close se- The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25
The door will reverse direction immediately dur-
quence has started. seconds.
ing power open or power close if the keyfob
button is pressed. A chime will sound to an- The lift gate will reverse direction immediately The panic alarm stops when:
nounce the reversal. during power open or power close if the keyfob
button is pressed. A chime will sound to an- ● it has run for 25 seconds, or
For more information, see “Operating the power
nounce the reversal. ● any button is pushed on the keyfob.
sliding door” earlier in this section.
For more information, see “Lift gate” later in this
section.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

NOTE: Using the interior lights
If you use the keyfob to change the horn Push the button on the keyfob once to turn
beep and lamp flash feature for vehicles on the interior lights and puddle lamps (if so
with color screen, the display will not show equipped).
the current mode and cannot be used to
For additional information, refer to “Lights on
change the mode. Use the keyfob to return
demand switch” in the “Instruments and controls”
to the previous mode and re-enable the section earlier in this manual.
display screen control. Refer to “Vehicle
electronic systems” in the “Display screen,
heater, air conditioner, audio and phone
systems” section for additional informa-
tion.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
LPD0262
and buttons for at least 2 seconds.
Silencing the horn beep feature
The hazard warning lights will flash three times to
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti- confirm that the horn beep feature has been
vated using the keyfob. deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

HOOD LIFT GATE

WARNING
● Always be sure the lift gate has been
closed securely to prevent it from open-
ing while driving.
● Do not drive with the lift gate open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-
haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
WPD0338 children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
᭺
1 Pull the hood lock release handle located WARNING
below the driver’s side instrument panel. The ● Always be sure that hands and feet are
hood will spring up slightly. ● Make sure the hood is completely clear of the door frame to avoid injury
closed and latched before driving. Fail- while closing the lift gate.
᭺
2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to the ure to do so could cause the hood to fly
side as illustrated with your fingertips and open and result in an accident.
raise the hood.
● If you see steam or smoke coming from
᭺
3 Insert the support rod into the slot on the the engine compartment, to avoid injury
underside of the hood. do not open the hood.
When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make
sure it locks into place.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

OFF while the lift gate is opening or closing will
cancel the operation and the lift gate will go to
manual mode.
When the switch is in the OFF position, the lift
gate can still be opened with the keyfob or over-
head console switch. The lift gate can also be
opened manually with the outside handle if the lift
gate is unlocked.

LPD0221 WPD0334
OPERATING THE MANUAL LIFT USING THE MAIN ON/OFF SWITCH
GATE FOR THE POWER LIFT GATE (if so
The power door lock system allows you to lock or equipped)
unlock all doors including the lift gate simulta- The main ON/OFF switch is located in the over-
neously.
head console.
To open the lift gate, depress the opener handle
Push the switch ON to enable the rear pillar
and lift up.
switch. An indicator light will illuminate when the
To close, lower and push the lift gate down se- switch is in the ON position.
curely.
Push the switch OFF to disable the rear pillar
switch. An indicator light will illuminate when the
switch is in the OFF position. Pushing the switch


06/29/07—debbie ੭

● The lift gate must be unlocked to open it with
the outside opener handle.
● The switch on the rear pillar cannot be used
to open the lift gate.
A warning chime will sound if the shift selector
lever is moved out of P (Park) during a power
open operation.
Power Close:
The power lift gate automatically moves from the
fully open position to the secondary position.
When the lift gate reaches the secondary posi-
tion, the cinching motor engages and pulls the lift
WPD0339 WPD0340 gate to its primary latch position. Power close
Rear pillar switch Overhead console switch takes approximately 7 – 10 seconds. The power
close feature can be activated by the switch on
OPERATING THE POWER LIFT keyfob and the overhead console and by the the keyfob, the overhead console and the rear
GATE (if so equipped) outside opener handle. The hazard lights flash pillar. The hazard lights flash and a chime sounds
and a chime sounds to indicate the power open to indicate the power close sequence has been
NOTE: sequence has been started. started.
To open, close or reverse the power lift ● The lift gate can be opened by the overhead ● If the outside opener handle is activated
gate, the shift selector lever must be in P console switch and the keyfob even if the while the cinching motor is engaged, the
(Park). Also, the power lift gate will not vehicle is locked. The lift gate will individually cinching motor will disengage and release
operate if battery voltage is low. unlock and open. Once the lift gate is the latch.
closed, its lock will align to the vehicle’s lock
Power Open: ● The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec-
or unlock status. ond before the lift gate closes.
The power lift gate automatically moves from the
fully closed position to the fully open position in ● The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec- ● The switch on the rear pillar can only be used
approximately 5 – 8 seconds. The power open ond before the lift gate opens. to close the lift gate if the main ON/OFF
feature can be activated by the switch on the switch is ON.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

Reverse: NOTE:
The power lift gate will reverse direction immedi-
If the pinch strip is damaged or removed,
ately during power open or power close if the the power close function will not operate.
keyfob, overhead console or rear pillar switch is
pressed. A chime will sound to announce the WARNING
reversal.
There are some small distances immedi-
Auto Reverse: ately before the closed position which
If an obstacle is detected during power open or cannot be detected. Make sure that all
power close, a warning chime will sound and the passengers have their hands, etc., inside
lift gate will reverse direction and return to the full the vehicle before closing the lift gate.
open or full close position. If a second obstacle is
detected, the lift gate motion will stop and the Manual Mode:
drive motor will disengage. The lift gate will enter If power operation is not available, the lift gate
may be operated manually. Power operation may
manual mode. LPD0238
not be available if the main ON/OFF switch is in
A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the lift the OFF position, if multiple obstacles have been Safe Mode:
gate. If an obstacle is detected by a pinch strip detected in a single power cycle, or if battery If the lift gate gas stays ᭺ lose pressure, the
1
during power close, the lift gate will reverse di- voltage is low. power lift gate safe mode is activated. When the
rection and return to the full open position. safe mode is activated, the lift gate slowly closes.
A continuous warning chime sounds until the lift
gate is in the fully down position. Then the lift gate
will be pulled to the closed and latched position
by a motor.
The power lift gate cannot be opened using the
switches at any time in the safe mode.
The auto reverse function remains active while
the lift gate is closing in the safe mode.
Do not operate the lift gate again until it is
checked by your NISSAN dealer.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

CAUTION CAUTION
● If the power lift gate does not stay open ● If the power lift gate does not stay open
or if the lift gate unexpectedly closes at or if the lift gate unexpectedly closes at
any time while a continuous warning any time while a continuous warning
chime sounds, do not operate the lift chime sounds, do not operate the lift
gate. There may be a pressure loss in gate. There may be a pressure loss in
one or both of the lift gate gas stays. one or both of the lift gate gas stays.
Have the lift gate inspected by a Have the lift gate inspected by a
NISSAN dealer. NISSAN dealer.
● Do not activate the power lift gate if one ● Do not activate the power lift gate if one
or both of the lift gate gas stays are or both of the lift gate gas stays are
removed. Damage to the lift gate or removed. Damage to the lift gate or
power lift gate mechanisms may occur. power lift gate mechanisms may occur.
LPD0230
LIFT GATE RELEASE Manual release
Manual lift gate (if so equipped)
WARNING
If the lift gate cannot be locked or unlocked with
● Always be sure the lift gate has been the door lock switch or the keyfob due to a
closed securely to prevent it from open- discharged battery, follow these steps:
ing while driving.
1. Remove the cover on the inside of the lift
● Do not drive with the lift gate open. This gate.
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex- 2. Move the lever down to lock or up to unlock.
haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”


06/29/07—debbie ੭

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

LPD0236 WPD0341 LPD0232
Power release OPENER OPERATION FUEL-FILLER CAP
Power lift gate (if so equipped)
The fuel-filler door release is located on the driv- The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the
If the lift gate cannot be opened with the door er’s door. To open the fuel-filler door, push the cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn
lock switch or keyfob due to a discharged battery, release. To lock, close the fuel-filler door se- the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are
follow these steps: curely. heard.
1. Remove the cover on the inside of the lift Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder ᭺ while
1
gate. refueling.
2. Move the lever up to open the lift gate.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WARNING ● Do not fill a portable fuel container in CAUTION
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and can cause an explosion of flammable ● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
highly explosive under certain condi- liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or flush it away with water to avoid paint
tions. You could be burned or seriously trailer. To reduce the risk of serious damage.
injured if it is misused or mishandled. injury or death when filling portable fuel ● Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.
Always stop the engine and do not containers: Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
smoke or allow open flames or sparks
near the vehicle when refueling. – Always place the container on the properly may cause the Mal-
ground when filling. function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off – Do not use electronic devices when nate. If the light illuminates be-
automatically. Continued refueling may filling. cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel – Keep the pump nozzle in contact missing, tighten or install the cap and
spray and possibly a fire. with the container while you are fill- continue to drive the vehicle.
● Use only an original equipment type ing it. The light should turn off after a
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a – Use only approved portable fuel con-
built-in safety valve needed for proper few driving trips. If the light
tainers for flammable liquid.
operation of the fuel system and emis- does not turn off after a few driving
sion control system. An incorrect cap trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
can result in a serious malfunction and NISSAN dealer.
possible injury. It could also cause the
● For additional information, see the
malfunction indicator light to come on.
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to the “Instruments and Controls” section
attempt to start your vehicle. earlier in this manual.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

STEERING WHEEL PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT (if so
equipped)

CAUTION
Do not adjust the pedal position with your
foot on the pedal.

WPD0342 WPD0357
TILT OPERATION The accelerator and brake pedals can be ad-
justed for driving comfort.
Pull the lock lever forward and adjust the steering
wheel up or down to the desired position. Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust the
brake and accelerator pedal position forward ᭺
1
Push the lock lever back to lock the steering
or backward ᭺. Pedal adjustment can only be
2
wheel in place.
performed when:
WARNING ● Ignition switch is in the OFF or ACC position
Do not adjust the steering wheel while ● Ignition switch is ON and the selector lever
driving. You could lose control of your is in the P (Park) position
vehicle and cause an accident.
The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be ad-
justed separately.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

SUN VISORS

᭺
1 To block glare from the front, swing down the
main sun visor.
᭺
2 To block glare from the side, remove the
main sun visor from the center mount and
swing the visor to the side.
᭺
3 Slide the sun visor in or out as needed.

WPD0345
VANITY MIRRORS
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
down and flip open the mirror cover. The vanity
mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is
open.

WPD0344


06/29/07—debbie ੭

MIRRORS

For information on HomeLinkா Universal Trans-
ceiver operation, see the “HomeLinkா Universal
Transceiver” in the “Instrument and controls” sec-
tion of this manual.

WPD0126 WPD0329
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
The night position ᭺ reduces glare from the
1 REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
headlights of vehicles behind you at night. The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-
Use the day position ᭺ when driving in daylight
2 cally changes reflection according to the intensity
hours. of the headlights of the vehicle following you.
The indicator light ᭺ will illuminate when the
1
WARNING
automatic anti-glare feature is on.
Use the night position only when neces-
sary, because it reduces rear view clarity. To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press
the O button.
To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature, press
the | button.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

Rotate the control lever to select the right or left Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
mirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired position by
moving the control lever. Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-
Automatic anti-glare outside mirrors (if tional information, see “Rear window and outside
so equipped) mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the
“Instrument and controls” section of this manual.
The outside mirrors will automatically dim during
nighttime conditions to reduce the glare from the
headlights of trailing vehicles. The automatic anti-
glare feature operates only when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
The automatic anti-glare feature will be on when
starting the vehicle. The indicator light on the
LPD0346
automatic anti-glare rearview mirror will illuminate
OUTSIDE MIRRORS when the automatic anti-glare feature is on.
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press
WARNING
the O button on the rearview mirror.
Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they The indicator light will turn off.
appear. Be careful when moving to the To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,
right. Using only this mirror could cause press the | button on the rearview mirror
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly The indicator light will turn on.
judge distances to other objects. For information on the automatic anti-glare rear-
The outside mirror remote control only operates view mirror, see “Automatic anti-glare rearview
when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON mirror” earlier in this section.
position.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if
so equipped)

Move the shift selector lever to R (Reverse). The The automatic drive positioner system has two
selected mirror will turn downward. features:
The selected mirror surface will return to its origi- ● Memory storage function
nal position when any of the following have oc-
● Entry/exit function
curred:
● The shift selector lever is moved to any po-
sition other than R (Reverse).
● The outside mirror control switch is set to the
N (Neutral) position.
● The ignition switch is turned OFF.

NOTE:
MPA0008
If the outside mirror control switch is in the
Foldable outside mirrors neutral position, neither mirror will turn
downward when the shift selector lever is
Push the mirrors backward to fold them. moved to R (Reverse).
Reverse tilt-down feature (if so For more information regarding this feature, refer
equipped) to “Automatic drive positioner” later in this sec-
tion.
The reverse tilt-down feature will turn the se-
lected outside mirror surface downward to pro-
vide better rear visibility close to the vehicle.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
turn the outside mirror control switch to the left or
right position. Only one mirror can be selected at
a time.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, accelerator and 1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi-
brake pedals, and outside mirrors to the tion.
desired positions by manually operating
2. While the indicator light for the memory
each adjusting switch. For additional infor-
switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-
mation, see “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats, onds, press the button on the keyfob.
seat belts and supplemental restraint sys- The indicator light will blink. After the indica-
tem” section and “Pedal position adjust- tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to that
ment” and “Outside mirrors” earlier in this memory setting.
section.
With the key removed from the ignition switch,
During this step, do not turn the ignition to press the button on the keyfob. The driv-
any position other than ON. er’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals, and out-
side mirrors will move to the memorized position.
4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,
push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at NOTE:
WPD0347
least 1 second.
MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION If a new memory position is saved to the
The indicator light for the pushed memory memory switch, the keyfob automatically
Two positions for the driver’s seat, accelerator switch will come on and stay on for approxi- re-links.
and brake pedals, and outside mirrors can be mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.
stored in the automatic drive positioner memory. After the indicator light goes off, the se- Confirming memory storage
Follow these procedures to use the memory sys- lected positions are stored in the selected
● Turn the ignition ON and push the SET
tem. memory (1 or 2).
switch. If the main memory has not been
1. Set the automatic transmission selector le- If a new memory is stored in the same memory stored, the indicator light will come on for
ver to the P (Park) position. switch, the previous memory will be deleted. approximately 0.5 seconds. When the
memory has stored the position, the indica-
2. Turn the ignition ON. Linking a keyfob to a stored memory tor light will stay on for approximately 5 sec-
position onds.
Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory ● If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow- fuse opens, the memory storage function will
ing procedure. be canceled and must be restarted before a

06/29/07—debbie ੭

stored memory position can be set again. ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION Restarting the entry/exit function
Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to
restart the memory storage function. You This system is designed so that the driver’s seat If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
can also restart the memory storage function will automatically move when the shift selector opens, the entry/exit function will be disabled.
using the following procedure. lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to
driver to get into and out of the driver’s seat more restart the entry/exit function. You can also restart
1. Connect the battery cable or replace the
easily. the entry/exit function using the following proce-
fuse.
dure.
The driver’s seat will slide backward:
2. Open and close the driver’s door more than
two times with the ignition key in the LOCK 1. Connect the battery cable or replace the
● When the key is removed from the ignition
position. fuse.
switch and the driver’s door is opened.
Once the memory storage function has been 2. Open and close the driver’s door more than
● When the driver’s door is opened with the
restarted, you can store a memory position. two times with the ignition key in the LOCK
key turned to LOCK.
See “Memory storage function” earlier in this position.
section. ● When the key is turned from ACC to LOCK
The entry/exit function should now work properly.
with the driver’s door open.
Selecting the memorized position SYSTEM OPERATION
The driver’s seat will return to previous position:
Set the shift selector lever to the P (Park) posi-
● When the key is inserted into the ignition The automatic drive positioner system will not
tion, then:
switch and the driver’s door is closed. work or will stop operating under the following
● Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’s conditions:
door, push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully ● When the driver’s door is closed with the key
for at least 1 second, or turned to LOCK. ● When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7
km/h).
● Turn the ignition switch to the ON position ● When the key is turned from ACC to ON
and push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for while the shift selector lever is in the P (Park) ● When any of the memory switches are
at least 1 second. position. pushed while the automatic drive positioner
is operating.
The driver’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals, The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-
and outside mirrors will move to the memorized celed. See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the ● When the adjusting switch for the driver’s
position with the indicator light blinking, and then “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio seat is turned on while the automatic drive
the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds. and phone systems” section of this manual. positioner is operating.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

● When the memory switch (1 or 2) is not
pushed and held for at least 1 second.
● When the seat has been already moved to
the memorized position.
● When no seat position is stored in the
memory switch.
● When the shift selector lever is moved from
P (Park) to any other position.
● When the driver’s door remains open more
than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is
not in the ON position.
The automatic drive positioner system can be
adjusted and canceled. See “Vehicle electronic
systems” in the “Display screen, heater, air con-
ditioner, audio and phone systems” section of
this manual.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

MEMO


4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner,
audio and phone systems

Control panel buttons — with monochrome screen . . . . 4-2 Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
How to use the TRIP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Heater and air conditioner (manual). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Door warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Control panel buttons — color screen without Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
How to use the joystick and ENTER button . . . . . . . . 4-7 Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
How to use the TRIP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Control panel buttons — color screen with Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
How to use the joystick and ENTER button . . . . . . . 4-17 Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Setting up the start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
How to use the TRIP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Rearview monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

06/29/07—debbie ੭

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
changer (Type A and B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-56 How to handle the DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System
Rear audio controls (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
DVD entertainment system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Digital video disc (DVD) player controls . . . . . . . . . . 4-66 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Flip-down screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Playing a digital video disc (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

06/29/07—debbie ੭

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITH
MONOCHROME SCREEN

WARNING
● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-
tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, or electrical shock.
● Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
● In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from
it, stop using the system immediately
and contact your nearest NISSAN
dealer. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock.

LHA0616
1. TRIP button (P. 4-3) If you use the system with the engine not
2. brightness control button running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
(P. 4-6) time, it will use up all the battery power,
and the engine will not start.
3. SETTING button (P. 4-5)
When you use this system, make sure the engine
is running.
4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

06/29/07—cathy ੭

Reference symbols: ● When driving uphill or rounding curves, the
fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily
TRIP button — This is a button on the control
change the display.
panel. By pressing this button you can select the
item or perform this action.
HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON
When the TRIP button is pressed, the following
modes will display on the screen.
Dist. to Empty → Average Speed → Fuel
Economy → Tire Pressure → Audio or OFF →
Dist. to Empty

LHA0617

Distance to empty (MI or km)
The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly
calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel
tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display
is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level
is low, the DTE display will change to — .

NOTE:
● If the amount of fuel added while the ignition
switch is OFF is small, the display just before
the ignition switch is turned OFF may con-
tinue to be displayed.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3

06/29/07—debbie ੭

LHA0618 LHA0619 LHA0620
Average speed (MPH or km/h) Fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km) Tire pressure information
The Average Speed mode shows the average The Fuel Economy mode shows the average fuel Pressure indication in **psi on the screen indi-
speed since the last reset. To calculate the aver- economy since the last reset. cates that the pressure is being measured. After
age speed, driving distance is divided by driving a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will
For approximately the first 30 seconds and 1/3
time. be displayed randomly.
mile (500 m) after a reset or connecting the
For approximately the first 30 seconds after a battery cables, the display will show —. The order of the tire pressure figures displayed
reset or reconnecting the battery cables, the on the screen does not correspond with the
Resetting fuel economy
display will show —. actual order of the tire position.
The fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0.
Resetting average speed
Press the TRIP button for more than approxi- Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the
The average speed calculation can be reset to 0. mately 2 seconds. heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the
Press the TRIP button for more than approxi- outside temperature.
mately 2 seconds.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

In case of low tire pressure, a message “LOW Clock Adjust MINUTES → Units → Lang → MP3 Clock operation
PRESSURE” or “CHECK ALL TIRES” is dis- Disp Type (if so equipped) → Audio or OFF →
played on the screen: Backlight The digital clock displays time when the ignition
key is in ACC or ON.
LOW PRESSURE — CHECK ALL TIRES. Backlight
If the power supply is disconnected, the
To turn off the screen, select “OFF” of the Back- clock will not indicate the correct time.
WARNING
light mode by pressing the TUNE button. Readjust the time.
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
The message “Press SETTINGS to resume” will Clock adjust hours
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
display for approximately 5 seconds then the
indicated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Press the SETTING button until Clock Adjust
screen will turn off.
System (TPMS) will not function and
HOURS is shown in the display. Press the TUNE
the low tire pressure warning light will To turn on the screen, press the SETTING button
button up or down to adjust the hour.
flash for approximately 1 minute. The and select “ON” by pressing the TUNE button.
light will remain on after 1 minute. Con- Clock adjust minutes
tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as When any button besides SETTING is pressed
possible for tire replacement and/or with the screen off, the screen turns on for further Press the SETTING button again Clock Adjust
system resetting. operation. The screen will turn off automatically Minutes is shown in the display. Press the TUNE
after the operation is finished. button up or down to adjust the minutes.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the Day mode brightness To exit the clock adjustment, press the SETTING
proper operation of the TPMS. The brightness of the screen during the day can button repeatedly. The screen will return to the
be changed by pressing the TUNE button. audio display if the audio is on. If the audio is not
HOW TO USE THE SETTING on, the screen will return to a blank display.
BUTTON For additional information, see “ button”
later in this section. Units
Pressing the SETTING button will change the
settings menu as follows: Night mode brightness To change the units press the TUNE button to
select “ENGLISH” or “METRIC”.
Backlight → Day Mode Brightness → Night The brightness of the screen during the night can
Mode Brightness → Clock Adjust HOURS → be changed by pressing the TUNE button. Unit: US — MI, °F, MPG
Metric — km, °C, L/100 km
For additional information, see “ button”
later in this section.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

Language Pressing the button with the headlights on will
prompt the “BRIGHTNESS DAY (MANUAL)” or
The language can be changed to “ENGLISH” or “BRIGHTNESS AUTOMATIC”. If “BRIGHT-
“FRANÇAIS” by pressing the TUNE button. NESS DAY (MANUAL)” is selected the bright-
MP3 display type (if so equipped) ness of the screen will not be affected by the
headlight operation. The brightness of the screen
To change how MP3 discs are displayed, press will be dependent on the settings in the Day
the TUNE button to select “DISC NUMBER” or Mode Brightness, described earlier in this sec-
“FOLDER NUMBER”. tion.
Disc number mode will display the file number in
the disc.
Folder number mode will display the file number
in the current folder.
LHA0643
For additional information, see “Audio System”
later in this section. DOOR WARNING
BUTTON The DOOR OPEN screen will be automatically
displayed as shown when both of the following
To change the display brightness, press conditions are met:
the button. Pressing the button with the
headlights off will prompt the “BRIGHTNESS ● The vehicle is driven with a door(s) open for
NIGHT (MANUAL)” or “BRIGHTNESS AUTO- longer than 2.5 seconds.
MATIC”. If “BRIGHTNESS NIGHT (MANUAL)” is ● The vehicle speed is greater than 3 MPH (5
selected, the brightness of the screen will not be km/h).
affected by the headlight operation. The bright-
ness of the screen will be dependent on the Beeping will occur during the door warning; to
settings in the Night Mode Brightness, described disable the beeping press any button. If a change
earlier in this section. in any door condition occurs during the time the
beep is cancelled, a warning will return.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — COLOR
SCREEN WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
Reference symbols:
ENTER button — This is a button on the control
item or perform this action.
“Display” key — This is a select key on the screen.
By selecting this key you can proceed to the next
function.
HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK AND
ENTER BUTTON
Use the joystick to choose an item on the display
screen. Move the joystick up, down, left or right to
highlight an item. Then press the ENTER button
to select the item or perform the action.
HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON
This button has two functions.
● Go back to the previous display (cancel).
If you press the BACK button during setup, the
setup will be canceled and/or the display will
LHA0621 return to the previous screen.
Display screen without navigation ● Finish setup.
1. TRIP button (P. 4-8) 5. SETTING button (P. 4-11)
In some screens pressing the BACK button ac-
2. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-7) If you use the system with the engine not cepts the changes made during setup.
3. Joystick and ENTER button (P. 4-7) running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
4. brightness control button time, it will use up all the battery power,
(P. 4-16) and the engine will not start.


06/29/07—cathy ੭

● Average Speed - Average speed driven
(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.
Resetting trip 1 and trip 2
Each trip screen can be reset to 0. Press the TRIP
button to select the TRIP screen to be reset.
● Select the “Reset” key on screen by press-
ing the ENTER button, or
● Press the TRIP button for more than approxi-
mately 1.5 seconds.

LHA0552 LHA0553

HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON Fuel economy
When the TRIP button is pressed, the following Press the TRIP button to display Average Fuel
modes will display on the screen. Economy and Distance To Empty.
Warning message (if any) → TRIP 1 → TRIP 2 → Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)
FUEL ECONOMY → MAINTENANCE → Audio
or OFF → TRIP 1 The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based
on fuel consumption since the last reset. The
Each trip display tracks an independent trip and display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3
displays the following: mile (500 m). After a reset or connecting the
● Elapsed Time - Journey time since the last battery cables, the display will show (**.*).
reset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59
minutes.
● Driving Distance - Distance driven (mile or
km) since the last reset.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

The average fuel economy calculation can be
reset to 0. Press the TRIP button repeatedly until
the FUEL ECONOMY menu is shown, then ei-
ther:
mately 1.5 seconds.
LHA0554 LHA0555
calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel Maintenance items Changing the maintenance interval
tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display Select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” key
is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level Press the TRIP button to display maintenance
information or set maintenance intervals for the using the joystick and press the ENTER button to
is low, the DTE display will change to (*). display the screen to change the maintenance
following:
interval.
NOTE: ● Engine Oil
Select the “Maintenance Schedule” key using the
● If the amount of fuel added while the ignition ● Tire Rotation joystick and move the joystick to right or left to set
switch is OFF is small, the display just before the maintenance interval.
the ignition switch is turned OFF may con- ● Tire Pressure (if so equipped)
tinue to be displayed. For setting the Tire Pressure display, refer to “Tire
● When driving uphill or rounding curves, the pressure information” later in this section.
change the display.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

● The ignition key is turned ON the next time
the vehicle will be driven.
To return to the previous display after the MAIN-
TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press
the BACK button.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays
each time the key is turned ON until one of the
following conditions are met:
● “Reset” key is selected.
● “Display Maintenance Notification” is set
OFF.
● The maintenance interval is set again.
LHA0556 LHA0483
Resetting the maintenance interval Displaying the maintenance notice re-
The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION mainte- minder
nance intervals can be reset to 0 miles (kilome- Select the “Display Maintenance Notification”
ters). key and press the ENTER button to display the
Select the “Reset” key using the joystick and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically
press the ENTER button. at the set maintenance interval.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen (ENGINE
OIL and TIRE ROTATION) will be automatically
conditions are met:
● The vehicle is driven the set distance and the
ignition key is turned OFF.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the
heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the
outside temperature.
In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-
played on the screen:
LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.

WARNING
indicated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
the low tire pressure warning light will
LHA0557 LHA0599
flash for approximately 1 minute. The
Tire pressure information light will remain on after 1 minute. Con- HOW TO USE THE SETTING
tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as BUTTON
To display tire pressure information, press the possible for tire replacement and/or
TRIP button repeatedly until the MAINTENANCE system resetting. When the SETTING button is pressed, the SET-
screen is displayed. Select the “Tire Pressure” TINGS screen will appear on the display. You can
key using the joystick and press the ENTER but- ● Replacing tires with those not originally select and/or adjust several functions, features
ton. specified by NISSAN could affect the and modes that are available for your vehicle.
proper operation of the TPMS. Move the joystick and press the ENTER button to
Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi- select each item to be set.
cates that the pressure is being measured. After
a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will
be displayed randomly.
The order of tire pressure figures displayed on
the screen does not correspond with the actual
order of the tire position.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LHA0622 LHA0625 LHA0642
Display settings Brightness/contrast/screen background: Display off:
Select the “Display” key and press the ENTER Select the “Brightness/Contrast/Screen Back- Select the “Display Off” key. The indicator of the
button. The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will ap- ground” key to adjust the brightness and contrast “Display Off” turns amber and the message
pear. of the screen. Use the joystick to select and above will be displayed briefly. When the audio,
adjust the brightness to darker or brighter and the HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any mode
contrast to lower or higher. button on the control panel is operated, the dis-
play turns on for that operation. If one of the
Use the joystick to select the “Screen Back-
control panel buttons is pressed, the display will
ground” key. Press the ENTER button or move
not automatically turn off until that operation is
the joystick right or left to choose a “Dark” or
finished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-
“Bright” screen background.
matically after 5 seconds.
The new settings are automatically saved when
you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK
button or any other mode button.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

To turn the screen on,
● Press the SETTING button and select the
“Display” key and then select the “Display
Off” key. Then set the screen to on by press-
● Hold the button for approximately 2
seconds and the message “resuming dis-
play” will appear and the “Display Off” key
will be automatically turned on (no amber
indicator).

LHA0622 LHA0651
Lower display setting: Any time audio information is shown on the main
part of the screen, HVAC information will be
You can choose to display the audio or HVAC
displayed on the lower part of the screen. HVAC
(Heater and air conditioner) functions on the
information will be shown even if “Audio” is se-
lower part of the display. Select the “Lower Dis-
lected to be displayed on the lower part of the
play Setting” key by using the joystick. Then se-
screen.
lect the “Audio” or “HVAC” key using the joystick
or by pressing the ENTER button.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LHA0559 LHA0564 LHA0565

Vehicle electronic systems Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle: Se- NOTE:
lect so the driver’s seat automatically moves back
Select the “Vehicle Electronic Systems” key by If you change the horn beep or the lamp
and returns to the original position for ease of exit
using the joystick and pressing the ENTER but- flash feature with the keyfob, the display
and entry.
ton. The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS screen will not show the current mode. Use
screen will be displayed. Remote unlock driver’s door first: Select to the keyfob to return to the previous mode
change which doors will unlock first during an and re-enable the display screen control.
You can set the following operating conditions by unlocking operation:
selecting the desired item using the joystick, then Keyless remote response — lights: Select to
pressing the ENTER button. The indicator light, Only the driver’s door ←→ All the doors turn on or turn off the hazard indicator flash mode
box at the left of the selected item, alternately used when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the
Keyless remote response — horn: Select to
turns on and off each time the ENTER button is keyfob is pressed.
turn on or turn off the horn chirp mode used when
pressed. the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob is
Indicator light is illuminated — ON pressed.
Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF


06/29/07—debbie ੭

NOTE: You can select the language and unit using the
joystick or pressing the ENTER button.
If you change the horn beep or the lamp
flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will The settings are automatically saved when you
not be changed with the display. Use the exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or
keyfob to return to the previous mode and any other mode button.
re-enable the display control.
Auto re-lock time: Select to set the length of
time before doors automatically re-lock.
Sensitivity of automatic headlights: Select
to change the sensitivity setting of the automatic
headlights:
● Lower: less sensitive, automatic headlights
will take longer to come on when the head- LHA0561
light sensor senses less ambient light. System settings
● Higher: more sensitive, automatic headlights
Select the “System Settings” key by using the
will come on quicker when the headlight
joystick and pressing the ENTER button. The
sensor senses less ambient light.
SYSTEM SETTINGS menu will be displayed.
Automatic headlights off delay: Select to
change the setting for the length of time the Language/unit
automatic headlights remain on after exiting the The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when
vehicle. selecting the “Language/Unit” key and pressing
Speed dependent wiper: Select to turn on or the ENTER button.
turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent Language: English or French
wiper function.
Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG
Return all settings to default: Select to
change all VEHICLE ELECTRONICS SYSTEMS
to their default settings.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
the button. Pressing the button again will
change the display to “DAY” or “NIGHT” display.
Then, adjust the brightness by moving the joy-
stick right or left.
If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if the
BACK button is pressed, the display will return to
the previous display.

LHA0600
Clock
Adjusting the time:
Select the “Hours” or “Minutes” key and move the
joystick to the right or left to adjust the time.
The time will change step by step.
or any other mode button.
Beep setting
With this option ON, a beep will sound if any
audio button is pressed.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —
COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION
10. brightness control button
(P. 4-28)
11. TRIP button (P. 4-18)
*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to
the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will use up all the battery power,
and the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
ENTER button — This is a button on the control
item or perform the action.
“Display” key — This is a select key on the screen.
By selecting this key you can proceed to the next
function.
HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK AND
ENTER BUTTON
LHA0631 Use the joystick to choose an item on the display
Display screen with navigation screen. Move the joystick up, down, left or right to
1. ROUTE button* 6. Joystick and ENTER button (P. 4-17) highlight an item. Then press the ENTER button
2. DEST button* 7. zoom in button* to select the item or perform the action.
3. MAP button* 8. VOICE button*
4. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-18) 9. SETTING button (P. 4-22)
5. zoom out button*


06/29/07—cathy ੭

HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON ● Average Speed - Average speed driven
(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.
This button has two functions.
Resetting trip 1 and trip 2
● Go back to the previous display (cancel).
Each trip screen can be reset to 0. Press the TRIP
If you press the BACK button during setup, the
button to select the TRIP screen to be reset.
setup will be canceled and/or the display will
return to the previous screen. ● Select the “Reset” key on screen by press-
● Finish setup.
In some screens pressing the BACK button ac-
mately 1.5 seconds.
cepts the changes made during setup.
SETTING UP THE START-UP
SCREEN LHA0552
When you turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, the HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON
system start-up warning is displayed on the
screen. Read the warning and select the “OK” When the TRIP button is pressed, the following
key by pressing the ENTER button. modes will display on the screen.
If you do not press the ENTER button, the Navi- Warning message (if any) → TRIP 1 → TRIP 2 →
gation system will not proceed to the next step in FUEL ECONOMY → MAINTENANCE → Audio
the Navigation display. or OFF → TRIP 1
If you do not touch a button or screen key for Each trip display tracks an independent trip and
more than 1 minute on the system start-up warn- displays the following:
ing screen, the screen will change to the audio
● Elapsed Time - Journey time since the last
screen automatically.
reset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59
To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate minutes.
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
● Driving Distance - Distance driven (mile or
km) since the last reset.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

The average fuel economy calculation can be
reset to 0. Press the TRIP button repeatedly until
the FUEL ECONOMY menu is shown, then ei-
ther:
mately 1.5 seconds.
LHA0553 LHA0554
Fuel economy calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel Maintenance items
tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display
Press the TRIP button to display Average Fuel is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level Press the TRIP button to display maintenance
Economy and Distance To Empty. is low, the DTE display will change to (*). information or set maintenance intervals for the
following:
Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)
NOTE: ● Engine Oil
The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based
● If the amount of fuel added while the ignition ● Tire Rotation
on fuel consumption since the last reset. The
switch is OFF is small, the display just before
display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3 ● Tire Pressure (if so equipped)
the ignition switch is turned OFF may con-
mile (500 m). After a reset or connecting the tinue to be displayed.
battery cables, the display will show (**.*). For setting the Tire Pressure display, refer to “Tire
● When driving uphill or rounding curves, the pressure information” later in this section.
change the display.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LHA0555 LHA0556 LHA0483
Changing the maintenance interval Resetting the maintenance interval Displaying the maintenance notice re-
Select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” key The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION mainte- minder
using the joystick and press the ENTER button to nance intervals can be reset to 0 miles (kilome- Select the “Display Maintenance Notification”
display the screen to change the maintenance ters). key and press the ENTER button to display the
interval. MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically
Select the “Reset” key using the joystick and
Select the “Maintenance Schedule” key using the press the ENTER button. at the set maintenance interval.
joystick and move the joystick to right or left to set The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen (ENGINE
the maintenance interval. OIL and TIRE ROTATION) will be automatically
conditions are met:
● The vehicle is driven the set distance and the
ignition key is turned OFF.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

● The ignition key is turned ON the next time Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the
the vehicle will be driven. heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the
outside temperature.
To return to the previous display after the MAIN-
TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-
the BACK button. played on the screen:
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.
each time the key is turned ON until one of the
following conditions are met: WARNING
● “Reset” key is selected. ● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
● “Display Maintenance Notification” is set to
indicated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
OFF.
● The maintenance interval is set again. the low tire pressure warning light will
LHA0557
flash for approximately 1 minute. The
Tire pressure information light will remain on after 1 minute. Con-
tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
To display tire pressure information, press the possible for tire replacement and/or
TRIP button repeatedly until the MAINTENANCE system resetting.
screen is displayed. Select the “Tire Pressure”
key using the joystick and press the ENTER but- ● Replacing tires with those not originally
ton. specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-
cates that the pressure is being measured. After
a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will
be displayed randomly.
The order of tire pressure figures displayed on
the screen does not correspond with the actual
order of the tire position.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LHA0558 WHA0715 WHA0716
HOW TO USE THE SETTING Display settings Brightness/contrast:
BUTTON Select the “Display” key and press the ENTER Select the “Brightness/Contrast” key to adjust
When the SETTING button is pressed, the SET- button. The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will ap- the brightness and contrast of the map back-
TINGS screen will appear on the display. You can pear. ground. Use the joystick to adjust the brightness
select and/or adjust several functions, features to darker or brighter and the contrast to lower or
and modes that are available for your vehicle. higher.
Move the joystick and press the ENTER button to The new settings are automatically saved when
select each item to be set. you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK


06/29/07—debbie ੭

To turn the screen on,
● Press the SETTING button and select the
“Display” key and then select the “Display
Off” key. Then set the screen to on by press-
● Hold the button for approximately 2
seconds and the message “resuming dis-
play” will appear and the “Display Off” key
will be automatically turned on (no amber
indicator).

LHA0642 WHA0715
Display off: Lower display setting:
Select the “Display Off” key. The indicator of the You can choose to display the audio or HVAC
“Display Off” turns amber and the message (Heater and air conditioner) functions on the
above will be displayed briefly. When the audio, lower part of the display. Select the “Lower Dis-
HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any mode play Setting” key by using the joystick. Then se-
button on the control panel is operated, the dis- lect the “Audio” or “HVAC” key using the joystick
play turns on for that operation. If one of the or by pressing the ENTER button.
control panel buttons is pressed, the display will
not automatically turn off until that operation is
finished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-
matically after 5 seconds.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LHA0651 LHA0559 LHA0564
Any time audio information is shown on the main Vehicle electronic systems Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle: Se-
part of the screen, HVAC information will be lect so the driver’s seat automatically moves back
displayed on the lower part of the screen. HVAC Select the “Vehicle Electronic Systems” key by and returns to the original position for ease of exit
information will be shown even if “Audio” is se- using the joystick and pressing the ENTER but- and entry.
lected to be displayed on the lower part of the ton. The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS
screen. screen will be displayed. Remote unlock driver’s door first: Select to
change which doors will unlock first during an
You can set the following operating conditions by unlocking operation:
selecting the desired item using the joystick, then
pressing the ENTER button. The indicator light, Only the driver’s door ←→ All the doors
box at the left of the selected item, alternately Keyless remote response — horn: Select to
turns on and off each time the ENTER button is turn on or turn off the horn chirp mode used when
pressed. the LOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.
Indicator light is illuminated — ON
Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF


06/29/07—debbie ੭

NOTE: ● Higher: more sensitive, automatic headlights
will come on quicker when the headlight
If you change the horn beep or the lamp
sensor senses less ambient light.
flash feature with the keyfob, the display
screen will not show the current mode. Use Automatic headlights off delay: Select to
the keyfob to return to the previous mode change the setting for the length of time the
and re-enable the display screen control. automatic headlights remain on after exiting the
vehicle.
Keyless remote response — lights: Select to
turn on or turn off the hazard indicator flash mode Speed dependent wiper: Select to turn on or
used when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent
keyfob is pressed. wiper function.

NOTE: Return all settings to default: Select to
change all VEHICLE ELECTRONICS SYSTEMS
If you change the horn beep or the lamp to their default settings.
flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will LHA0561
not be changed with the display. Use the System settings
keyfob to return to the previous mode and
re-enable the display control. Select the “System Settings” key by using the
joystick and pressing the ENTER button. The
Auto re-lock time: Select to set the length of SYSTEM SETTINGS screen will be displayed.
time before doors automatically re-lock.
Language/unit
Sensitivity of automatic headlights: Select
to change the sensitivity setting of the automatic The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when
headlights: selecting the “Language/Unit” key and pressing
● Lower: less sensitive, automatic headlights the ENTER button.
will take longer to come on when the head- Language: English or French
light sensor senses less ambient light.
Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG


06/29/07—debbie ੭

You can select the language and unit using the
joystick or pressing the ENTER button.
The settings are automatically saved when you
exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or
any other mode button.

LHA0562 LHA0566
Clock Setting daylight savings time:
Adjusting the time: Use the “Daylight Saving Time” key to adjust the
clock to daylight savings time.
Select the “Hours” or “Minutes” key and move the
joystick to the right or left to adjust the time. ON: Automatically adjusts for daylight savings
time.
The time will change step by step.
OFF: The current time is displayed.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LHA0567 LHA0568 LHA0563
Adjusting the time to the GPS: Selecting the time zone: 2. Select one of the following zones, depend-
Select the “Auto Adjust” key. 1. Select the “Select Time Zone” key. ing on the current location.

The time will be reset to the GPS time. The TIME ZONE screen will appear. ● Pacific zone
● Mountain zone
● Central zone
● Eastern zone
● Atlantic zone
● Newfoundland zone
After selection, the CLOCK SETTINGS screen
will appear.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)

The GPS time (manual time) corresponding to When the shift selector lever is shifted into the R ● When washing the vehicle with high-
the selected zone will be displayed. Pacific zone (Reverse) position, the monitor display shows the pressure water, be sure not to spray it
has been set as the initial (default) setting. view directly to the rear of the vehicle. around the camera. Otherwise, water
Beep setting may enter the camera unit causing wa-
WARNING ter condensation on the lens, a mal-
With this option ON, a beep will sound if any function, fire or an electric shock.
audio button is pressed. ● The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in detecting large stationary ob- ● Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-
Navigation settings jects to help avoid damaging the ve- sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- hicle. The system will not detect small function or cause damage resulting in a
er’s Manual for information regarding these set- objects below the bumper, and may not fire or an electric shock.
tings. detect objects close to the bumper or
on the ground. CAUTION
Guidance voice settings
● The rearview camera is a convenience There is a plastic cover over the camera.
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- but it is not a substitute for proper back- Do not scratch the cover when cleaning
er’s Manual for information regarding these set- ing. Always turn and check that it is safe dirt or snow from the cover.
tings. to do so before backing up. Always
BUTTON
back up slowly. HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
● Objects viewed in the rearview monitor LINES
To change the display brightness, press differ from actual distance because a
the button. Pressing the button again will Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and
wide-angle lens is used.
change the display to “DAY” or “NIGHT” display. distances to objects with reference to the
Then, adjust the brightness by moving the joy- ● Make sure that the lift gate is securely bumper line ᭺ are displayed on the monitor.
A
stick right or left. closed when backing up.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if the ● Do not put anything on the rearview
BACK button is pressed, the display will return to camera. The rearview camera is in-
the previous display. stalled beside the license plate light.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN ● When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not clearly display ob-
To adjust the quality of the screen, refer to “HOW jects. This is not a malfunction.
TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON” in this section.
● When strong light directly enters the cam-
● When it is difficult to see in the rearward
era, objects may not be displayed clearly.
direction due to shady conditions, press the
ENTER button to make objects in the moni- ● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
tor brighter. screen. This is due to strong reflected light
● To change the brightness, press the ENTER from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.
button again, turn the key switch OFF or shift ● The screen may flicker under fluorescent
to R (Reverse) and wait for 10 seconds. light. This is not a malfunction.
OPERATING TIPS ● The colors of objects on the rearview moni-
● When the selector lever is shifted to R (Re- tor may differ somewhat from those of the
LHA0437
verse), the monitor screen automatically actual object.
They are indicated as reference distances to
objects. The lines and colors in the display indi- changes to the rearview monitor mode. ● When the contrast of objects is low at night,
cate distances from the back bumper line ᭺ inA However, the radio can be heard. pressing the ENTER button may not change
the illustration. ● It may take some time until the rearview the brightness.
monitor is displayed after the selector lever
᭺
1 1.5 ft (0.5 m) red
has been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects
● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark place or at night.
᭺
2 3 ft (1 m) yellow may be distorted momentarily until the rear-
view monitor screen is displayed completely. ● If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,
᭺
3 7 ft (2 m) green
When the selector lever is returned to a the rearview monitor may not display ob-
᭺
4 10 ft (3 m) green position other than R (Reverse), it may take jects. Clean the camera.
some time until the screen changes. Objects
The vehicle clearance lines are wider than ● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
on the screen may be distorted until they are
the actual clearance. clean the camera. This will cause discolora-
completely displayed.
tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent
and then wipe with a dry cloth.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

VENTILATORS

● Do not damage the camera as the monitor
screen may be adversely affected.
● Do not use body wax on the camera window.
Wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-
ened with mild detergent diluted with water.

WHA0626
Adjust air flow direction for the driver and pas-
senger side᭺, center ᭺, and rear passenger
1 2
᭺ ventilators by moving the ventilator slide
3
and/or ventilator assemblies.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual)

WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals. LHA0627

● Do not use the recirculation mode for 1. Fan speed control dial Air flow control buttons
long periods as it may cause the interior 2. Air conditioner button
The air flow control buttons allow you to select
air to become stale and the windows to 3. Front window defrost/defog button
the air flow outlets.
fog up. 4. Rear window defroster switch
5. Air recirculation button — Air flows from center and side
6. Temperature control dial ventilators.
7. Air flow control buttons — Air flows from center and side
ventilators and the front and rear
CONTROLS floor outlets.
Fan control dial — Air flows mainly from the front and
rear floor outlets.
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and
— Air flows from defroster outlets
controls fan speed.
and the front and rear floor
outlets.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

— Air flows from defroster outlets Air conditioner button 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
Temperature control dial tion.
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust desired position and push the button to sired position between the middle and the
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the turn on the air conditioner. A/C will appear on the hot position.
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase display when the air conditioner is operating. To
the temperature, turn the dial to the right. turn off the air conditioner, push the button Ventilation
Air recirculation button again, the display will show A/C OFF. This mode directs outside air to the side and
The air conditioner cooling function oper- center ventilators.
ON position: ates only when the engine is running. 1. Push the button to the OFF position
Push the button to recirculate air inside
Rear window defroster switch ( shown on display).
the vehicle.
For more information about the rear window de- 2. Press the air flow control button.
Push the button to the on position when:
froster switch, see “Rear window defroster 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
● driving on a dusty road. switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section tion.
● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas- of this manual.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
senger compartment. HEATER OPERATION sired position.
● for maximum cooling when using the air con-
ditioner. Heating Defrosting or defogging
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to
OFF position:
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost defrost/defog the windows.
Push the button again to turn air recircula-
tion off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger outlets. 1. Press the defrost/defog button .
compartment and distributed through the se- 1. Push the button to the OFF position 2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
lected outlet. for normal heating ( shown on dis- tion.
Use the off position for normal heater or air con- play).
ditioner operation. 2. Press the air flow control button. sired position between the middle and the
hot position.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win- 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- Operating tips
dows, turn the fan control dial to the highest sired position.
setting and the temperature control to the Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
full HOT position. Heating and defogging and air inlet in front of the windshield. This
improves heater operation.
● When the position is selected, the air This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-
conditioner automatically turns on (however, shield. AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
A/C will not appear on the display) if the 1. Press the air flow control button. Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
outside temperature is more than 36°F desired position, and push in the button to
(2°C). The air conditioning system will con- 2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- activate the air conditioner. When the air condi-
tinue to operate until the fan control dial is tion. tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions
turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- are added to the heater operation.
if an air flow control button other than sired position between the middle and the The air conditioner cooling function oper-
is selected. This dehumidifies the air which hot position. ates only when the engine is running.
helps defog the windshield. The
mode automatically turns off, allowing out- ● When the position is selected, the air Cooling
side air to be drawn into the passenger conditioner automatically turns on (however,
A/C will not appear on the display) if the This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
compartment to further improve the defog-
ging performance. outside temperature is more than 36°F 1. Push the button to the OFF position.
(2°C). The air conditioning system will con-
Bi-level heating tinue to operate until the fan control dial is 2. Press the air flow control button.
turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side
if an air flow control button other than tion.
and center vents and to the front and rear floor
is selected. This dehumidifies the air which
outlets. 4. Push the button. A/C will appear on
helps defog the windshield. The
the display.
1. Push the button to the OFF position mode automatically turns off, allowing out-
( shown on display). side air to be drawn into the passenger 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
compartment to further improve the defog- sired position.
2. Press the air flow control button.
ging performance.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

● For quick cooling when the outside tem- Operating tips AIR FLOW CHARTS
perature is high, push the button to
the ON position ( shown on display). ● Keep the windows closed while the air con- The following charts show the button and dial
Be sure to return the to the OFF po- ditioner is in operation. positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
sition for normal cooling ( shown on cooling or defrosting. For additional information
● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3
display). on heating and cooling see “Heater and air con-
minutes with the windows open to vent hot
ditioner” in this section.The air recirculation
Dehumidified heating air from the passenger compartment. Then,
( ) button should always be in the OFF
close the windows. This allows the air con-
position for heating and defrosting.
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air. ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
1. Push the button to the OFF position ● The air conditioning system should be
( shown on display). operated for approximately 10 minutes
at least once a month. This helps pre-
2. Press the air flow control button.
vent damage to the system due to lack
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- of lubrication.
tion.
● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
4. Push the button. The display shows ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
A/C. is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
sired position. ● If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
perature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. See “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WHA0644 WHA0645


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WHA0646 WHA0647


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WHA0648


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WHA0649


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WHA0650


06/29/07—debbie ੭

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)

● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
Start the engine and operate the controls to
activate the air conditioner.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling or heating (auto)
This mode may be normally used all year round as
the system automatically works to keep a con-
stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan
LHA0629 speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Driver temperature control dial/ WARNING 1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be
AUTO button displayed.)
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
2. A/C ON/OFF button
erates only when the engine is running. 2. Turn the driver’s side temperature control
3. Fan speed control (decrease)
4. Front window defroster button ● Do not leave children or adults who dial to the left or right to set the desired
would normally require the assistance temperature. Driver and passenger tem-
5. System off button
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets peratures can be set independently. Press
6. Rear window defroster button
should also not be left alone. They DUAL or turn the passenger temperature
7. Fan speed control (increase) could accidentally injure themselves or control dial to the left or right to activate dual
8. Air recirculation button others through inadvertent operation of climate control functions. Turn the passen-
9. Passenger temperature control dial/ the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, ger’s side temperature control dial to the left
DUAL button temperatures in a closed vehicle could or right to set the desired passenger’s tem-
10. Air flow/MODE buttons quickly become high enough to cause perature.
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
● Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F
people or animals.
(24°C) for normal operation.

06/29/07—cathy ੭

● The temperature of the passenger compart- button is used to turn off the compressor Air flow control
ment will be maintained automatically. Air even if an air flow MODE button other
flow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/off than is selected. This dehumidifies Pushing the MODE button manually controls air
are also controlled automatically. the air which helps defog the windshield. flow and selects the air outlet:
The air recirculation mode automatically — Air flows from center and side
● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn ventilators.
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
into the passenger compartment to further — Air flows from center and side
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
improve the defogging performance. ventilators and foot outlets.
malfunction.
MANUAL OPERATION — Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging — Air flows from defroster and foot
1. Push the defroster control button to Fan speed control buttons outlets.
turn the system on. The display will show the Press the fan speed control buttons +/– — Air flows from defroster outlets.
defrost icon. to manually control the fan speed. To turn system off
2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right Press OFF to turn the system off. Press the OFF button.
to set the desired temperature.
Push the AUTO button to return to automatic OPERATING TIPS
● To quickly remove ice from the outside of the control of the fan speed.
windows, press and hold the + but- ● When the engine coolant temperature and
ton to set the fan speed to maximum. Air recirculation outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a
● As soon as possible after the windshield is The mode automatically turns off, allowing maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is
clean, push the AUTO button to return to the outside air to be drawn into the passenger com- not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-
auto mode. partment to prevent fogging. ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets
● When the DEF control is activated, will operate normally.
Push the air recirculation button to recir-
the air conditioner will automatically be
culate interior air inside the vehicle. Push the
turned on at outside temperatures above
AUTO button to return to automatic mode.
36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for more than
one minute, the air conditioning system will The air recirculation button will not be activated
continue to operate until the fan control is when the air conditioner is in DEF mode.
turned OFF, the vehicle is shut off, or the A/C

06/29/07—debbie ੭

REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER

LIC0954 LHA0676 LHA0628
The sunload sensor ᭺, located on the top center
1 Rear seat temperature and fan speed can be 1. Rear fan speed control dial.
of the instrument panel, helps the system main- controlled from both the front seat overhead con- 2. Rear temperature control dial.
tain a constant temperature. Do not put anything sole controls ᭺ or the rear seat overhead con-
A
on or around this sensor. sole controls ᭺.
B

Press the REAR CTRL button to transfer control
of the rear climate functions to the rear passen-
ger’s.
To operate the rear air conditioner, the engine
must be running.
If the rear seat fan control dial is set to (0), the air
conditioner is turned off. If it is set to any of the fan
speed positions, air is discharged from the rear
vents at the corresponding speed.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve- RADIO
hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with
the environment in mind. Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position
and press the POWER/VOLUME control knob to
This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with the
ozone layer. engine not running, the key should be turned to
Special charging equipment and lubricant is re- the ACC position.
quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-
Radio reception is affected by station signal
tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-
system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-
and lubricant recommendations” in the “Techni- ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
cal and consumer information” section of this normally are caused by these external influences.
manual. Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-
WHA0630
A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ- hicle may influence radio reception quality.
CONTROLS mentally friendly” air conditioning system.
Radio reception
Fan control dial WARNING Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
The fan control dial turns the rear vent fan on and The air conditioner system contains re- state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-
off, and controls fan speed. frigerant under high pressure. To avoid dio reception. These circuits are designed to
personal injury, any air conditioner ser- extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-
Temperature control dial vice should be done only by an experi- ity of that reception.
The temperature control dial allows rear passen- enced technician with proper equipment. However there are some general characteristics
gers to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These char-
acteristics are completely normal in a given re-
ception area, and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

Reception conditions will constantly change be- Static and flutter: During signal interference from SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, buildings, large hills or due to antenna position equipped)
signal distance and interference from other ve- (usually in conjunction with increased distance
hicles can work against ideal reception. De- from the station transmitter) static or flutter can When the satellite radio is first installed or the
scribed below are some of the factors that can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may
affect your radio reception. treble control to reduce treble response. not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait
more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and
Some cellular phones or other devices may Multipath reception: Because of the reflective the vehicle outside of any metal or large building
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary
from the audio system speakers. Storing the de- signals reach the receiver at the same time. The data.
vice in a different location may reduce or elimi- signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-
nate the noise. mentary flutter or loss of sound. No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is
FM RADIO RECEPTION AM RADIO RECEPTION selected unless optional satellite receiver and
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi AM signals, because of their low frequency, can antenna are installed and an XMா satellite radio
(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM bend around objects and skip along the ground. service subscription is active. Satellite radio is
having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter- In addition, the signals can be bounced off the not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of Satellite radio performance may be affected if
station reception even if the FM station is within these characteristics, AM signals are also sub- cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio
25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is ject to interference as they travel from transmitter signal.
directly related to the distance between the to receiver.
transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line- If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing antenna.
of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
off objects. affect satellite radio performance. Remove the
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from areas where no obstacles exist. ice to restore satellite radio reception
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
and/or drift.
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

Compact disc (CD) player ● Do not expose the CD to direct sun-
light.
CAUTION ● CDs that are in poor condition or are
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD dirty, scratched or covered with finger-
insert slot. This could damage the CD prints may not work properly.
and/or CD changer/player. ● The following CDs may not work prop-
● Trying to load a CD with the CD door erly:
closed could damage the CD and/or CD ● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
changer.
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time. ● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm) ● Do not use the following CDs as they
round discs that have the “COMPACT may cause the CD player to malfunc-
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc tion:
or packaging. ● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
● During cold weather or rainy days, the ● CDs that are not round
player may malfunction due to the hu-
● CDs with a paper label
midity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player ● CDs that are warped, scratched, or
completely. have abnormal edges
LHA0099
● The player may skip while driving on ● This audio system can only play pre-
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS rough roads. recorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
● The CD player sometimes cannot func-
tion when the compartment tempera- ● If the CD cannot be played, one of the
ture is extremely high or low. following messages will be displayed.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

CHECK DISC: virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3
compression removes the redundant and
● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor- irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the
rectly (the label side is facing up, human ear doesn’t hear.
etc.).
● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
● Confirm that the CD is not bent or bits per second used by a digital music file.
warped and it is free of scratches. The size and quality of a compressed digital
PRESS EJECT: audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
This is an error due to excessive tem-
● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
perature inside the player. Remove the
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
CD by pressing the EJECT button. After
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD
conversion) per second.
can be played when the temperature of
the player returns to normal. ● ID3 tag — The ID3 tag is the part of the
encoded MP3 file that contains information
UNPLAYABLE:
about the digital music file such as song title,
The file is unplayable in this audio sys- artist, album title, encoding bit rate, track
tem (only MP3 CD). time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is
displayed on the Album/Artist/Track title line
Compact Disc with MP3 on the display.
Terms:
WHA1090
● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the Playback order chart
most well-known compressed digital audio Playback order:
file format. This format allows for near “CD Playback order of the CD with compressed files
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of (MP3) is as illustrated.
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the ● The names of folders not containing MP3
file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with files are not shown in the display.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“ROOT” is displayed.
● The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW
Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
Supported
MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
versions*
Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512
Text character number limitation 31 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:
Displayable character codes
(UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
Cannot play
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names
and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Poor sound quality
Bit rate may be too low.
It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3 disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.
before the music starts
playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
Music cuts off or skips
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
files
Moves immediately to the When a non-MP3 file has been given an extension of “.MP3” or “.mp3”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there will be approximately 5
next song when playing seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
Songs do not play back in The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
the desired order


06/29/07—debbie ੭

13. AUDIO button [BASS, MID, TREBLE,
FADE, BALANCE and SSV (if so
equipped)]
14. CD eject button
15. AUX jack
16. CD insert slot

*No satellite radio reception is available
and “NO SAT” is displayed when the
SAT button is pressed unless optional
satellite receiver and antenna are
installed, and an XMா satellite radio
service subscription is active. Satellite
radio not available in Alaska, Hawaii and
Guam.
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER
For all operation precautions, see ЉAudio opera-
tion precautionsЉ earlier in this section.
LHA0634 No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
1. SEEK/TRACK button 7. AUX button SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is
pressed unless optional satellite receiver and
2. PRESET A·B·C button 8. TUNE/CAT button
antenna are installed, and an XMா satellite radio
3. CD/DVD button 9. DISP button
service subscription is active. Satellite radio not
4. Station select (1 - 6) buttons 10. FM·AM/SAT (satellite) radio button* available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
5. POWER/VOLUME control knob 11. SCAN/RPT button
6. REAR CTRL button 12. Rear speaker control button

06/29/07—debbie ੭

Audio main operation sound level between the front and rear speakers MP3 display mode
and Balance adjusts the sound between the right
Power/Volume control: To change the text displayed when listening to an
and left speakers.
MP3 with MP3 text (when CD with text is being
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID or used), press the DISP button. The DISP button
press the POWER/VOLUME control knob while HIGH, press the TUNE button. will scroll through the CD text as follows: Folder,
the system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) Artist and Track title ←→ Folder title ←→ Artist
which was playing immediately before the system Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
title → Track title.
was turned off. desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly
until the radio or CD display reappears. Other- To change the default display mode, press the
To turn the system off, press the wise, the radio or CD display will automatically SETTING button repeatedly until MP3 Disp Type
POWER/VOLUME control knob. reappear after about 10 seconds. appears on the display, then press the TUNE
Turn the POWER/VOLUME control knob to ad- button to select the following display modes:
DISP (display) button:
just the volume. Folder number ←→ Disc number.
This DISP (display) button will show text about
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen- Once a display mode is selected, press the SET-
MP3 (if so equipped), CD or SAT information in
sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume TING button again to store the setting.
the audio display.
changes as the driving speed changes.
● Folder number mode displays the folder
CD display mode
AUDIO button (BASS, MID, TREBLE, FADE, number and the file number of the folder
BALANCE and SSV if so equipped): To change the text displayed while playing a CD currently being played.
with text, press the DISP button. The DISP button
Press the AUDIO button to change the mode as ● Disc number mode displays the number se-
will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows:
follows: lected disc and the track that is currently
Track number ←→ Disc title ←→ Track title.
being played.
BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE
● Track title mode displays the title of the se-
→ SSV (if so equipped) Display satellite radio display mode (if so
lected CD track.
equipped)
To adjust Bass, Mid, Treble, Fade and Balance,
● Disc title mode displays the title of the CD
press the AUDIO button until the desired mode To change the text displayed when listening to
being played.
appears in the display. Press the TUNE button to satellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISP
adjust Bass, Mid and Treble to the desired level. ● Track number mode displays the number button. The DISP button will scroll through the
You can also use the TUNE Button to adjust selected disc and the track that is currently broadcast information as follows: Name ←→
Fader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts the being played on the disc. Title ←→ Current display mode.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

To change the default display mode press the When FM·AM or SAT* radio select button is SEEK tuning:
AUDIO button to display mode and press the pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or
TUNE button to select the following display ON, the radio will come on at the station last Press the SEEK/TRACK button or
modes: Channel number ←→ Channel name played.
for less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low
←→ Name ←→ Title. Once the display mode is The last station played will also come on when or low to high frequencies and stop at the next
selected press the AUDIO button again to store the POWER/VOLUME control knob is pressed broadcasting station.
the setting. If the AUDIO button is not pressed ON. SCAN RPT tuning:
after 8 seconds the display will refresh with the
last selected display mode setting. *No satellite radio reception is available and “NO Press the SCAN RPT button for more than 1.5
SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is seconds to stop at each broadcasting station
● Channel number mode displays the channel pressed unless optional satellite receiver and (AM, FM or SAT if so equipped) for 5 seconds.
number of the selected satellite radio sta- antenna are installed, and an XMா satellite radio Pressing the button again during this 5 second
tion. service subscription is active. Satellite radio is period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN RPT
● Channel name mode displays the channel
name of the selected satellite radio station. If a compact disc is playing when the FM·AM or button is not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN
SAT* radio select button is pressed, the compact tuning moves to the next station.
● Name mode displays the name of the artist, disc will automatically be turned off and the last Station memory operations:
host or weather condition of the selected radio station played will come on.
satellite radio station. 18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT
The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM radio to the A, B and C preset button in any
● Title mode displays the song title, show stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast combination of AM, FM or SAT* stations.
name, or temperature of the selected satel- signal is weak, the radio will automatically change
lite radio station. from stereo to monaural reception. 1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to change
between storage banks. The radio displays
FM/AM/SAT radio operation TUNE (Tuning): the icon A, B or C to indicate which set of
presets are active.
FM/AM/SAT band select:
To manually tune the radio, press the TUNE
2. Tune to the desired station using manual,
Pressing the FM·AM or SAT (satellite - if so button or .
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
equipped) radio select button will change the
To move quickly through the channels, hold either of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
band as follows:
the or button down for more than 6) until a beep sound is heard. (The radio
AM ←→ FM or SAT* 1.5 seconds. mutes when the select button is pressed).

06/29/07—cathy ੭

3. The channel indicator will then come on and If the system has been turned off while the com- several times to skip back through tracks. The
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now pact disc was playing, pressing the compact disc will go back the number of times
complete. POWER/VOLUME control knob will start the the button is pressed.
compact disc.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man- When the button is pressed for less than
ner. CD/DVD button: 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the
next track will start to play from its beginning.
* SAT presets are only available on SAT equipped When the CD/DVD button is pressed with the
Press several times to skip through tracks. The
vehicles. system off and the compact disc loaded, the
compact disc will advance the number of times
system will turn on and the compact disc will start
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse the button is pressed. (When the last track on the
to play.
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that compact disc is skipped through, the first track
case, reset the desired stations. When the CD/DVD button is pressed with the will be played.)
compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the
Radio data system (RDS): When the or button is pressed for
radio will automatically be turned off and the
more than 1.5 seconds, the CD will fast forward
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data compact disc will start to play.
or rewind.
information service transmitted by some radio
SEEK/TRACK (Fast For-
stations on the FM band (not AM band) and/or SCAN/RPT:
ward and Rewind):
SAT radio encoded within a regular radio broad-
When the SCAN/RPT button is pressed while
cast. Currently, most RDS stations are in large When the SEEK/TRACK button is pressed for
the compact disc is being played, the play pattern
cities, but many stations are now considering more than 1.5 seconds, (fast forward)
can be changed as follows:
broadcasting RDS data. or (rewind) while the compact disc is be-
ing played, the compact disc will play while fast 1 DISC RPT → 1 TRACK RPT → 1 DISC RDM
Compact disc (CD) player operation forwarding or rewinding. When the button is re-
1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position leased, the compact disc will return to normal
be repeated
and insert the compact disc into the slot with the play speed.
1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playing
label side facing up. The compact disc will be SEEK/TRACK: will be repeated.
guided automatically into the slot and start play-
1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-
ing.
When the button is pressed for less than rently playing will be played randomly.
If the radio is already operating, it will automati- 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the
cally turn off and the compact disc will play. track being played returns to its beginning. Press

06/29/07—debbie ੭

REAR CTRL: When button is pressed while the com-
pact disc is being played, the compact disc will
Pressing the REAR CTRL button turns the rear eject and the system will turn off.
seat audio controller on. REAR CTRL ON will
display. Pressing it again will turn the rear seat CD IN indicator:
audio controller off. REAR CTRL OFF will display. CD IN indicator appears on the display when the
If the vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat CD is loaded with the system on.
audio controller, the display will show “REAR AV
N/A”.
AUX (Auxiliary) button:
The AUX jack is located on the CD player. The
AUX audio input jack accepts any standard ana-
log audio input such as from a portable cassette
tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop com-
puter.
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
when it is plugged into the AUX jack.
(SPEAKER CONTROL) button:

Press this button to turn the rear speakers
off and the headphones on. Press this
button again to turn rear seat speakers back on
and the headphones off.
CD EJECT:

When the button is pressed with the com-
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

11. SCAN/RPT button
12. Rear speaker control button
equipped)]
14. CD load button
15. CD eject button
16. CD insert slot
17. AUX jack

Guam.

LHA0635
Type A
1. SEEK/TRACK button 6. REAR CTRL button
2. PRESET A·B·C button 7. AUX button
3. CD/DVD button 8. TUNE/FLDR·CAT button
4. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons 9. DISP button
5. POWER/VOLUME control knob 10. FM·AM/SAT (satellite) radio button*


06/29/07—debbie ੭

11. FM·AM/SAT (satellite) radio select
button*
12. Rear speaker control button
13. RPT·RDM button
equipped)]
15. CD load button
16. CD eject button
17. CD insert slot
18. AUX jack

Guam.
LHA0636 FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
Type B COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER
1. SEEK/TRACK button 6. REAR CTRL button (Type A and B) (if so equipped)
2. PRESET A·B·C button 7. AUX button
3. CD/DVD button 8. TUNE/FLDR·CAT button For all operation precautions, see ЉAudio opera-
4. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons 9. DISP button tion precautionsЉ earlier in this section.
5. POWER/VOLUME control knob 10. SCAN button


06/29/07—cathy ੭

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO To adjust Bass, Mid, Treble, Fade and Balance, ● Disc title mode displays the title of the CD
SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is press the AUDIO button until the desired mode being played.
pressed unless optional satellite receiver and appears in the display. Press the TUNE button to
● Track number mode displays the number
antenna are installed, and an XMா satellite radio adjust Bass, Mid and Treble to the desired level.
selected disc and the track that is currently
service subscription is active. Satellite radio not You can also use the TUNE Button to adjust
being played on the disc.
available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. Fader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts the
sound level between the front and rear speakers MP3 display mode (if so equipped)
Audio main operation and Balance adjusts the sound between the right
To change the text displayed when listening to an
Power/Volume control: and left speakers.
MP3 with MP3 text (when CD with text is being
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID or used), press the DISP button. The DISP button
press the POWER/VOLUME control knob while HIGH, press the TUNE button. will scroll through the CD text as follows: Folder,
the system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) Artist and Track title ←→ Folder title ←→ Artist
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
which was playing immediately before the system title → Track title.
desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly
was turned off.
until the radio or CD display reappears. Other- To change the default display mode, press the
To turn the system off, press the wise, the radio or CD display will automatically AUDIO button repeatedly until DISPLAY MODE
POWER/VOLUME control knob. reappear after about 10 seconds. appears on the display, then press the TUNE
Turn the POWER/VOLUME control knob to ad- DISP (display) button: button to select the following display modes:
just the volume. Folder number ←→ Disc number.
This DISP (display) button will show text about
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen- MP3 (if so equipped), CD or SAT information in Once a display mode is selected, press the AU-
sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume the audio display. DIO button again to store the setting.
changes as the driving speed changes. ● Folder number mode displays the folder
CD display mode
AUDIO button (BASS, MID, TREBLE, FADE, number and the file number of the folder
To change the text displayed while playing a CD currently being played.
BALANCE and SSV if so equipped):
with text, press the DISP button. The DISP button
Press the AUDIO button to change the mode as will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows: ● Disc number mode displays the number se-
follows: Track number ←→ Disc title ←→ Track title. lected disc and the track that is currently
being played.
BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE ● Track title mode displays the title of the se-
→ SSV (if so equipped) lected CD track.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

Display satellite radio display mode (if so FM/AM/SAT radio operation TUNE (Tuning):
equipped)
FM/AM/SAT band select:
To change the text displayed when listening to To manually tune the radio, press the
satellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISP Pressing the FM·AM or SAT (satellite - if so TUNE/FLDR·CAT button or .
equipped) radio select button will change the
button. The DISP button will scroll through the To move quickly through the channels, hold either
band as follows:
broadcast information as follows: Name ←→ the or button down for more than
Title ←→ Current display mode. AM ←→ FM or SAT* 1.5 seconds.
To change the default display mode press the When FM·AM or SAT* radio select button is SEEK tuning:
AUDIO button to display mode and press the pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or
TUNE button to select the following display ON, the radio will come on at the station last Press the SEEK/TRACK button or
modes: Channel number ←→ Channel name played. for less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low
←→ Name ←→ Title. Once the display mode is The last station played will also come on when or low to high frequencies and stop at the next
selected press the AUDIO button again to store the POWER/VOLUME control knob is pressed broadcasting station.
the setting. If the AUDIO button is not pressed ON. SCAN RPT tuning (Type A only):
after 8 seconds the display will refresh with the
*No satellite radio reception is available and “NO Press the SCAN RPT button for more than 1.5
last selected display mode setting.
SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is seconds to stop at each broadcasting station
● Channel number mode displays the channel pressed unless optional satellite receiver and (AM, FM or SAT if so equipped) for 5 seconds.
number of the selected satellite radio sta- antenna are installed, and an XMா satellite radio Pressing the button again during this 5 second
tion. service subscription is active. Satellite radio is period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN RPT
● Channel name mode displays the channel
If a compact disc is playing when the FM·AM or button is not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN
name of the selected satellite radio station. tuning moves to the next station.
SAT* radio select button is pressed, the compact
● Name mode displays the name of the artist, disc will automatically be turned off and the last SCAN tuning (Type B only):
host or weather condition of the selected radio station played will come on.
satellite radio station. Press the SCAN button for more than 1.5 sec-
The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM onds to stop at each broadcasting station for 5
● Title mode displays the song title, show stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast seconds. Pressing the button again during this 5
name, or temperature of the selected satel- signal is weak, the radio will automatically change second period will stop SCAN tuning and the
lite radio station. from stereo to monaural reception. radio will remain tuned to that station. If the

06/29/07—cathy ੭

SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds, Radio data system (RDS): To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press
SCAN tuning moves to the next station. the load button for more than 1.5 seconds.
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data
Station memory operations: information service transmitted by some radio The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the
stations on the FM band (not AM band) and/or display when CDs are loaded into the changer.
18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT
SAT radio encoded within a regular radio broad-
radio to the A, B and C preset button in any CD/DVD button:
cast. Currently, most RDS stations are in large
combination of AM, FM or SAT* stations.
cities, but many stations are now considering When the CD/DVD button is pressed with the
1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to change broadcasting RDS data. system off and the compact disc loaded, the
between storage banks. The radio displays system will turn on and the compact disc will start
the icon A, B or C to indicate which set of Compact disc (CD) changer operation to play.
presets are active. Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position. When the CD/DVD button is pressed with the
2. Tune to the desired station using manual, To insert the disc, first press the LOAD button. compact disc loaded with the radio playing, the
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any Insert the compact disc into the slot with the label radio will automatically be turned off and the
of the desired station memory buttons (1 – side facing up. The compact disc will be guided compact disc will start to play.
6) until a beep sound is heard. (The radio automatically into the slot and start playing.
SEEK/TRACK:
mutes when the select button is pressed). If the radio is already operating, it will automati-
3. The channel indicator will then come on and cally turn off and the compact disc will play. When the button is pressed while a com-
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now If the system has been turned off while the compact disc is playing, the track being played re-
complete. pact disc was playing, pressing the turns to its beginning. Press several times to skip
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man- POWER/VOLUME control knob will start the back through tracks. The compact disc will go
ner. compact disc. back the number of times the button is pressed.

* SAT presets are only available on SAT equipped CD LOAD button: When the button is pressed while the
vehicles. compact disc is playing, the next track will start to
To insert a CD in the CD changer, press play from its beginning. Press several times to
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse the load button for less than 1.5 seconds. skip through tracks. The compact disc will ad-
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that Select the loading slot by pressing the CD insert vance the number of times the button is pressed.
case, reset the desired stations. select button (1 – 6), then insert the CD. (When the last track on the compact disc is
skipped through, the first track will be played.)

06/29/07—debbie ੭

TUNE/FLDR·CAT 1 TRACK REPEAT: The track that is currently (SPEAKER CONTROL) button:
(Folder·Catalog): playing will be repeated.
ALL DISC RANDOM: Tracks from all discs will be Press this button to turn the rear speakers
While playing an MP3, press the played randomly.
TUNE/FLDR·CAT button or to scan off and the headphones on. Press this
1 DISC RANDOM: Tracks from the disc that is button again to turn rear seat speakers back on
through available folders. currently playing will be played randomly. and the headphones off.
TUNE/FLDR·CAT (Fast RPT·RDM button (Type B only):
Forward and Rewind): CD EJECT:
When the RPT·RDM button is pressed while the
When the TUNE/FLDR·CAT button is pressed for compact disc is played, the play pattern can be
more than 1.5 seconds, (fast forward) Current/Selected disc:
changed as follows:
or (rewind) while the compact disc is be- ● Press the button, then press the slot
ing played, the compact disc will play while fast 1 DISC REPEAT→ 1 TRACK REPEAT → ALL number (1 – 6) for the desired disc. The
forwarding or rewinding . When the button is DISC RANDOM → 1 DISC RANDOM compact disc will be ejected. If no slot num-
released, the compact disc will return to normal ber (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loaded
1 DISC REPEAT: The disc that is currently play-
play speed. disc will be ejected. Also, if the ejected disc
ing will be repeated.
CD select buttons: 1 TRACK REPEAT: The track that is currently is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc
playing will be repeated. will reload.
To play another CD that has been loaded, press a ALL DISC RANDOM: Tracks from all discs will be
CD select button (1 – 6). played randomly. All discs:
SCAN/RPT (Type A only): 1 DISC RANDOM: Tracks from the disc that is ● Press and hold the button for more
currently playing will be played randomly. than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be
When the SCAN/RPT button is pressed while
the compact disc is being played, the play pattern REAR CTRL: ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed
can be changed as follows: within 15 seconds, or the button is
Pressing the REAR CTRL button turns the rear pressed again during the eject sequence,
1 DISC REPEAT → 1 TRACK REPEAT → ALL seat audio controller on. REAR CTRL ON will the entire disc eject sequence will be can-
DISC RANDOM → 1 DISC RANDOM display. Pressing it again will turn the rear seat celed.
audio controller off. REAR CTRL OFF will display.
1 DISC REPEAT: The disc that is currently play- If the vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat When this button is pressed while the compact
ing will be repeated audio controller, the display will show “REAR AV disc is being played, the compact disc will eject
N/A”. and the last source will be played.

06/29/07—cathy ੭

CD IN indicator: ● A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDs
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
have been loaded into the changer in CD mode
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
only.
AUX (Auxiliary) button:
The AUX jack is located on the CD player. The
AUX audio input jack accepts any standard ana-
log audio input such as from a portable cassette
tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop com-
puter.
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
when it is plugged into the AUX jack.
LHA0049
CD CARE AND CLEANING
● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
● Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
● Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

If you have the Type B switch, with the ignition key
turned to the ACC or ON position, push the
MODE switch to turn the audio system on.
MODE select switch
Push the MODE select switch to change the
mode in the following sequence: PRESET A →
PRESET B → PRESET C → CD → DVD (if so
equipped) → AUX.
While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,
B or C), use the tuning switch or to
select one of the preset radio stations (1-6).
WHA0640 WHA0637 Volume control switch
Type A Type B Push the volume control switch up or down to
1. Volume control switch 1. Volume control switch increase or decrease the volume.
2. MODE select switch 2. Phone operation switch
3. POWER on/off switch 3. POWER on and MODE select switch Tuning
4. Tuning switch 4. Tuning switch Memory change (radio):
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,
AUDIO CONTROL B or C), push the tuning switch or
The audio system can be operated using the for less than 1.5 seconds to change to the next
controls on the steering wheel. preset station in memory.
POWER on/off switch Seek tuning (radio):
With the ignition key turned to the ACC or ON Push the tuning switch or for more
position, push the POWER switch to turn the than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous
audio system on or off. radio station.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

Next/Previous track (CD):
Push the tuning switch or for less
than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the
present track or skip to the next track. Push
several times to skip back or skip through tracks.
This system searches for the blank intervals be-
tween selections. If there is a blank interval within
1 program or there is no interval between pro-
grams, the system may not stop in the desired or
expected location.
Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):
Push the SEEK tuning switch or for
more than 1.5 seconds to change the playing
disc up or down.

LHA0322
1. VOL (volume) control button 7. Infrared headphone transmitter lens*
2. MODE select button
3. speaker control button *Red transmitters will be visible when
4. NEXT button infrared headphones are on.
5. SEEK button
6. Headphone jacks

06/29/07—debbie ੭

REAR AUDIO CONTROLS (if so VOL (volume) button: NOTE:
equipped) The VOL button allows the rear passengers to The AUX jack can only be turned on by the
adjust the headphone volume level. The vehicle front control panel.
Press the REAR CTRL button on the front radio
control panel to turn the rear controls on. Press volume can also be changed if the REAR CTRL is For additional information on the AUX jack, see
the button again to turn the rear controls off. enabled and the rear audio mode is the same as “AUX (Axiliary) button” earlier in this section.
the front.
The headphones symbol illuminates on the front SEEK button:
display when the rear audio controls are on. Two (SPEAKER CONTROL) button:
In AM or FM mode, the SEEK button allows the
headphone jacks are provided so two rear seat rear seat passengers to find the next radio station
passengers may listen to the audio system pri- Press this button to turn the rear speakers up or down the station band frequency.
vately. off and headphones on. Press this button
again to turn rear seat speakers back on and In CD mode, the SEEK button allows the rear
The rear volume controls can only increase the headphones off. passengers to find the next or previous selection
volume to the level at which the front radio volume on the CD.
control is set. MODE button (Type A only): NEXT button:
One or two (if so equipped) infrared headphones The MODE button allows the rear passengers to When the NEXT button is pressed while in AM,
are included if the vehicle is equipped with the change between AM, FM, CD, DVD, AUX jack FM or SAT mode (if so equipped), the radio will
DVD entertainment system. Most portable radio and AUX(SAT) (if so equipped). The media op- change to the next preset.
headphones work with the rear audio controls. tions are listed on the face plate of the rear audio
controls. When a source of media is selected, the When playing a CD in the CD changer (if so
For vehicles equipped with the FM/AM/SAT radio equipped), press the NEXT button to change
with compact disc player, if the rear passengers media label will be illuminated.
between discs when multiple discs are loaded.
turn off the rear speakers and are using head- MODE button (Type B and C):
phones they may choose to listen to a different The NEXT button does not function while playing
media than the front passengers. The rear pas- The MODE button allows the rear passengers to a DVD or single CD.
sengers can listen to the radio along with the change between AM, FM, CD, DVD and AUX-
front passengers or they can listen to a CD or (SAT) (is so equipped). The media options are
SAT radio (if so equipped). listed on the face plate of the rear audio controls.
When a source of media is selected, the media
label will be illuminated.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (if so
equipped)

ANTENNA CAUTION
Window antenna
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear display may break if hit with a hard or
passenger and driver side windows. sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not
touch the liquid crystalline material,
CAUTION which contains a small amount of mer-
cury. In case of contact with skin, wash
● Do not place metalized film near the immediately with soap and water.
rear driver or passenger side window
glass or attach any metal parts to it. This ● Use a damp, soft cloth when cleaning
may cause poor reception or noise. the DVD Entertainment System compo-
nents. Do not use solvents or cleaning
● When cleaning the inside of the rear solutions.
driver or passenger side window, be
careful not to scratch or damage the LHA0641 ● To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-
window antenna. Lightly wipe along the tery, do not operate the system more
antenna with a dampened soft cloth. WARNING than 15 minutes without starting the
engine.
● The DVD Entertainment System is de-
signed for rear seat passenger viewing Do not attempt to use the system in extreme
only. temperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) or
● The driver must not attempt to operate above 158°F (70°C)]
the DVD Entertainment System while
the vehicle is in motion so that full at-
tention may be given to vehicle
operation.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LHA0316
1. EJECT button DIGITAL VIDEO DISC (DVD) PLAYER
2. DVD slot CONTROLS
3. ENTER button
Refer to “Playing a digital video disc (DVD)” later
4. POWER on/off button
in this section for the function of each button.
5. MODE button
6. Input jacks
7. STOP button
8. PLAY/PAUSE button LHA0317
9. MENU button 1. POWER button
10. DISPLAY button 2. STOP button
11. NAVIGATION keys 3. NEXT TRACK/CHAPTER and
PREVIOUS TRACK/CHAPTER button
4. TITLE button
5. ENTER button

06/29/07—cathy ੭

6. DISPLAY button CAUTION
7. MODE button
8. SUBTITLE button ● The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if hit with a hard or
9. AUDIO button
sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not
10. ANGLE button touch the liquid crystalline material,
11. CLEAR button which contains a small amount of mer-
12. PAUSE button cury. In case of contact with skin, wash
13. PLAY button immediately with soap and water.
14. FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE ● The screen rotates down to view and up
button into the housing to store when not in
15. MENU button use. Ensure that the screen is latched
16. NAVIGATION keys securely into the housing when stored.
17. BACK button
LHA0315
18. NUMERIC KEYPAD
REMOTE CONTROL FLIP-DOWN SCREEN
Refer to “Playing a digital video disc (DVD)” later The flip-down screen has a wireless remote con-
in this section for the function of each button. trol receiver ᭺ located at the bottom of the
1
screen.
On vehicles equipped with 2 screens for second
and third row passengers, both screens will have
a remote control receiver.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

PLAYING A DIGITAL VIDEO DISC
(DVD)
CAUTION
● Only operate the DVD while the vehicle
engine is running. Operating the DVD
for extended periods of time with the
engine OFF can discharge the vehicle
battery.
● Do not allow the system to get wet.
Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-
uids may cause the system to
malfunction.
SAA0720 SAA0721
● The driver must not attempt to wear the
Headphones NOTE:
headphones while the vehicle is in mo-
Power ON/OFF: For optimum infrared headphone perfor- tion so that full attention may be given
mance, increase the volume on the rear to vehicle operation.
Press the power button to turn the headphones seat controller to the maximum level and
● While playing video CD media, this DVD
on or off. adjust the infrared headphone volume us-
player does not guarantee complete
ing the volume control on the headphones.
Volume control: functionality of all video CD formats.
Using a lower volume setting on the rear
Turn the volume control knob to adjust the vol- seat controller can cause static noise in the With the DVD player, you can hear DVD videos,
ume. infrared headphones. video CDs and CDs using headphones. Passen-
gers in the rear seat can enjoy the sound inde-
The headphones will automatically be turned off
pendently of the front seat.
in 30 seconds if there is no sound during that
period. To prevent the battery from being dis- Press the CD/DVD button located on the front
charged, keep the power supply turned off when controls to hear the sound of the DVD player
not in use. through the speakers.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

Pressing the button on the front controls on the faceplate, Red = right channel audio input, NEXT CHAPTER/
turns the rear speakers on and off. White = left channel audio input, and Yellow = PREVIOUS CHAPTER
Video input). (Remote control only):
It is possible to operate the DVD player by remote
control. The display will show the “AUX” in the upper left When the (NEXT CHAPTER) button is
corner of the display for 4 seconds once the pressed while the DVD is being played, the pro-
Headphones are a wireless type and no cables
Mode is changed to AUX. gram next to the present one will start to play from
are necessary. You can use them in almost all the
its beginning. Press several times to skip through
ranges in the rear seat. (It is not possible to use To use the input jacks, refer to “Auxiliary input
programs. The DVD will advance the number of
the headphones in the front seat.) jacks” in this section.
times the button is pressed. When the
POWER on/off button: or PLAY: (PREVIOUS CHAPTER) button is pressed, the
program being played returns to its beginning.
With the ignition switch turned to the ACC or ON
When the PLAY/PAUSE button on the player or Press several times to skip back through pro-
position, press the POWER button to turn the
the PLAY button on the remote control is grams. The DVD will go back the number of times
DVD player on or off.
pressed, the player will play. the button is pressed.
Insert the DVD into the slot with the label side
In play mode, the display will briefly show or PAUSE:
facing up. The DVD will be guided automatically
into the slot. on the upper left corner of the display.
When the PLAY/PAUSE button on the player or
If the DVD player is off and a DVD is inserted, the FF (Fast Forward), REW
the PAUSE button on the remote control is
DVD player will automatically turn on. (Remote control only):
pressed, the player will pause playing of the
Press FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE but- media. In pause mode, the player will show
CAUTION tons to carry out the fast forward or fast reverse on the upper left corner of the display until the
Do not force the compact disc into the presentation at 5 times normal play speed. player is changed to another mode.
slot. This could damage the player. Press FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE but- STOP:
MODE select button: tons again or PLAY button to resume the normal
play speed. Press the STOP button once to stop playing the
Press the MODE button to select Audio/Video media. The display will show in the upper
source between DVD and AUX input (input jacks left corner of the display for 4 seconds, and the
last disc position will be stored. When the PLAY


06/29/07—cathy ੭

button is pressed again, it will resume at the ● Use NAVIGATION KEYS to navigate within forward, and the display will show ,
stored disc track and time position. the display menu, and use ENTER to select and a forward arrow symbol respectively in the
the item. upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds.
If the STOP button is pressed again when the
player is already in Stop mode, it will reinitialize (Faceplate feature only)
● Holding the DISPLAY control on the face-
the pointer to the beginning of the disc. In effect it plate for longer than approximately 2 sec- If media is in activated MENU mode, the NAVI-
will ignore the last stored disc position and upon onds while in the display menu will reset the GATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up,
receipt of the next play message it will begin at display characteristics to their nominal val- Down, Left, and Right within the menu.
the Title Menu, or at “the beginning of the disc”. ues. (Faceplate feature only)
If display control menu is on, the NAVIGATION
EJECT: If the DISPLAY control button on the faceplate is KEYS will be used to navigate Up, Down, Left,
pressed for more than 2 seconds, the media and Right within the menu.
When the EJECT button is pressed with the DVD track/time information will be displayed along the
loaded, it will be ejected. ENTER:
bottom of the display. Pressing the DISPLAY
The display will show the EJECT symbol in control for more than 2 seconds will remove the In MENU mode, press the ENTER button to se-
the upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds media track/time information from the display. lect MENU items.
once the EJECT button is pressed. (Faceplate feature only)
In the display menu, press the ENTER button to
If the DVD is not loaded, the display will show NAVIGATION KEYS: select items for modification, as per the on-
“NO DISC”. screen instructions.
If media is in PLAY mode, activation of the NAVI-
If the DVD comes out and is not removed within GATION KEYS (Up, Down, Left, and Right) will MENU:
25 seconds, it will be pulled back into the slot to perform the following functions: next
protect it. chapter/track, previous chapter/track, fast re- If the media is in PLAY mode and the MENU
verse and fast forward, and the display will button is pressed, the DVD menu will appear on
DISPLAY: the screen. Use Navigation Keys to navigate
show , , and respec-
If the DISPLAY control is pressed for less than 2 tively in the upper left corner of the display for 4 within the menu, and use ENTER to select the
seconds, the display menu will appear on the seconds. (Faceplate feature only) item.
screen.
If media is in PAUSE mode, activation of the Press the MENU button again to return to PLAY
● The display menu will remain on the screen NAVIGATION KEYS (Up, Down and Right) will mode.
for 10 seconds if no subsequent control perform the following functions: next
activations occur. chapter/track, previous chapter/track and slow

06/29/07—debbie ੭

TITLE (Remote control only): CLEAR (Remote control only): Auxiliary input jacks
Press TITLE button to return the DVD media to Press the CLEAR button to clear all numeric The auxiliary input jacks are located on the control
the “title” of the DVD. inputs, if actuated prior to expiration of the panel. Compatible devices such as video games,
3-second timer. camcorders and portable video players can be
Press TITLE button again to return to the previous
stop point and play. NUMERIC KEYPAD (0–9 & ≥10) (Remote connected to the auxiliary jacks.
control only): The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica-
BACK (Remote control only):
Press the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly access tion purposes.
Press the BACK button to exit the current active
disc chapters, titles or tracks by inputting their ● Yellow - video input
menu and return to the previous menu.
numeric value.
SUBTITLE (Remote control only): ● White - left channel audio input
The “≥10” button input numbers greater than or
Press the SUBTITLE button to call up subtitle equal to 10, allowing up three digits to be input ● Red - right channel audio input
selection menu. for selecting chapter/title/track number. CARE AND MAINTENANCE
Repeatedly press the SUBTITLE button to cycle The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons will Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean the
through each available subtitle. continuously shift the previously input number to surfaces of your DVD Entertainment System.
the “left”. (DVD player face, screen, remote control, etc.)
AUDIO (Remote control only):
The chapter/title/track number will be automati-
Press the AUDIO button to call up audio menu. CAUTION
cally selected (if valid, based on media content) if
Repeatedly press the AUDIO button to cycle 3 seconds expire without any keypad inputs. ● Do not use any solvents or cleaning
through each available audio track. solutions when cleaning the video
The operator can cancel the input
ANGLE (Remote control only): chapter/title/track number by actuating the system.
CLEAR control prior to the expiration of the ● Do not use excessive force on the moni-
Press the ANGLE button to call up camera angle
3-second timer. tor screen.
menu.
These functions can be used only for the DVD ● Avoid touching or scratching the moni-
Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cycle tor screen as it may become dirty or
discs which correspond to them.
through each available angle. damaged.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

Do not attempt to use the system in extreme ● A new disc may be rough on its inner
temperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) or and outer edges. Remove the rough
above 158°F (70°C)] edges using the side of a pen or pencil
Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme as illustrated.
humidity conditions (less than 10% or more than ● Never attempt to use a DVD that has
75%). been cracked, deformed, or repaired
using adhesive. Doing so may cause
damage to the equipment.
● Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contami-
nation or flaws. Otherwise, signals may not
be read properly.
● Do not write, draw or attach anything on any
LHA0049 side of the DVD.
HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD ● Do not store the DVD in locations with direct
sunlight or in high temperatures or humidity.
CAUTION ● Always place discs in the storage case when
● Handle a DVD by its edges. Never touch they are not being used.
the surface of the disc. ● Do not put on any sticker or write anything
● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from on either surface of the DVD.
the center to the outer edge using a
clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc
using a circular motion.
● Do not use a conventional record
cleaner, benzine, thinner or alcohol in-
tended for industrial use.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

● DVDs with a region code other than 5. If the disc cannot be ejected see your
“1”. The region code ᭺ is displayed in
A NISSAN dealer for further assistance.
a small symbol printed on the top of 6. Re-program the radio presets.
the DVD ᭺.B

● DVDs that are not round.
● DVDs with a paper label.
● DVDs that are warped, scratched, or
have unequal edges.
● Recordable digital video discs
(DVD+R).
● Rewritable digital video discs
(DVD+RW).
If a DVD with a paper label is used and
becomes jammed, you may be able to reset
the unit and eject the jammed disc with the
following procedure:
1. Record the radio presets.
2. Disconnect the negative terminal from
LHA0484 the battery for five minutes.
DVD player operation precautions 3. Reconnect the negative battery termi-
nal.
Do not use the following DVDs as they may
cause the DVD player to malfunction: 4. Check to see if the jammed DVD has
been ejected. If it has not, try to eject
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter.
the DVD by pushing the eject button.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

● When changing batteries, do not let dust or
oil get on the remote control and head-
phones.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment. This device complies
with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210
of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any inter-
LHA0318 SAA0723 ference received, including interference
If the battery is removed for any reason that may cause undesired operation of the
Remote control and headphones device.
battery replacement other than replacement, close the lid se-
curely.
Replace the battery as follows:
● If you will not be using the remote control for
1. Open the lid. long periods of time, remove the batteries.
2. Replace batteries with new ones. ● Replacement of the batteries is needed
when the remote control only functions at
● Size AA (remote control)
extremely close distances to the DVD player
● Size AAA (headphones) or not at all.
Make sure that the and ends on ● Be careful not to touch the battery terminal.
the batteries match the markings inside the
● An improperly disposed battery can harm
compartment.
the environment. Always confirm local regu-
3. Close the lid securely. lations for battery disposal.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTHா HANDS-FREE PHONE

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
CAUTION WARNING
your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following
precautions, otherwise the new equipment may ● Keep the antenna as far away as pos- ● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
adversely affect the engine control system and sible from the electronic control in a safe location. If you have to use a
other electronic parts. modules. phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
WARNING be given to vehicle operation.
(20 cm) away from the electronic con-
● A cellular telephone should not be used trol system harnesses. Do not route the ● If you are unable to devote full attention
while driving so full attention may be antenna wire next to any harness. to vehicle operation while talking on
given to vehicle operation. Some juris- the phone, pull off the road to a safe
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele- location and stop your vehicle.
as recommended by the manufacturer.
phones while driving.
● Connect the ground wire from the CB CAUTION
● If you must make a call while your ve- radio chassis to the body.
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu- To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
lar phone operational mode (if so ● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer. use a phone after starting the engine.
equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-
ercise extreme caution at all times so
full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
● If a conversation in a moving vehicle
requires you to take notes, pull off the
road to a safe location and stop your
vehicle before doing so.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

module when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position with the paired cellular phone turned
on and carried in the vehicle.
You can register up to 5 different Bluetoothா
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Before using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
● Set up the wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module before using the hands-free phone
system.
● Some Bluetoothா enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone module. Please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list and pairing.
● You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
LHA0638
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetoothா make or receive a hands-free telephone call with vice area.
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have an ap- your cellular phone in the vehicle.
proved Bluetoothா enabled cellular phone, you – Your vehicle is in an area where it is
Once your cellular phone is paired to the in- difficult to receive a cellular signal; such
can set up the wireless connection between your
vehicle phone module, no other phone connect- as in a tunnel, in an underground parking
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto- garage, near a tall building or in a moun-
With Bluetoothா wireless technology, you can
matically connected with the in-vehicle phone tainous area.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it ● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual Initialization
from being dialed. regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON
● When the radio wave condition is not ideal position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be This device complies with Part 15 of the which takes a few seconds. When completed,
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur- FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- the amber light on the overhead console illumi-
ing a call. lowing two conditions: (1) this device may nates and the system is ready to accept voice
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this commands. If the button is pressed before
● Do not place the cellular phone in an area
device must accept any interference re- the initialization completes, the system will an-
surrounded by metal or far away from the
ceived, including interference that may nounce “Hands-free phone system not ready”
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
cause undesired operation. and will not react to voice commands.
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption. FCC Radiation Exposure Statement: Operating tips
● While a cellular phone is connected through This equipment complies with FCC radiation ex- To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat- posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi- Voice Recognition system, observe the following:
tery power of the cellular phone may dis- ronment. This equipment should be installed and
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetoothா operated with minimum distance of 8 inches (20 ● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge cm) between the radiator and your body. This possible. Close the windows to eliminate
cellular phones. Transmitter must not be co-located or operating surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
in conjunction with any other antenna or transmit- sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
● If the hands-free phone system seems to be from recognizing voice commands correctly.
ter.
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”
later in this section. You can also visit USING THE SYSTEM ● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble- command. Otherwise, the command will not
shooting help. The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows be received properly.
hands-free operation of the Bluetoothா Phone
● Some cellular phones or other devices may System. ● Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
cause interference or a buzzing noise to after the tone sounds.
come from the audio system speakers. Stor- If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to ● Speak in a natural voice without pausing
ing the device in a different location may between words.
reduce or eliminate the noise. vehicle operation.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

Giving voice commands ● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice – “One eight hundred six six two six two oh
feedback, press the volume control switches oh”,
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press (+ or -) on the steering wheel while being – NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty
and release the button located on the provided with feedback. You can also use two hundred, and
steering wheel. The light on the overhead con- the radio volume control knob.
sole flashes to signal you have entered a voice – NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two
recognition (VR) session. After the tone sounds, ● In most cases you can interrupt the voice feed- hundred.
speak a command. back to speak the next command by pressing
● Numbers can be spoken in small groups.
the button on the steering wheel.
The command given is picked up by the micro- The system will prompt you to continue en-
phone, and voice feedback is given when the ● To speed the operation you can say multiple tering digits, if desired.
command is accepted. commands. For example, press the
Example: 1-800-662-6200
button then say “Phonebook, New entry”
● If you need to hear the available commands rather than “Phonebook.” Wait for the voice – “One eight oh oh”
for the current menu again, say “Help” and feedback prompt then say “New entry”. The system repeats the numbers and
the system will repeat them.
How to say numbers prompts you to enter more.
● If a command is not recognized, the system – “six six two”
announces, “Command not recognized. NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
Please try again.” Repeat the command in a way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer The system repeats the numbers and
clear voice. to the following rules and examples. prompts you to enter more.
– “six two oh oh”
● If you want to go back to the previous com- ● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.
mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” ● You can say “Star” for * and “Pound” for # at
Example: 1-800-662-6200
any time the system is waiting for a response. any time in any position of the phone number.
– “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh Example: 1-555-1212 *123
● You can cancel a command when the sys- oh”, or
tem is waiting for a response by saying, – “One five five five one two one two star
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces – “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh one two three”
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can oh”
also press the button on the steering NOTE:
● Words can be used for the first 4 digits
wheel at any time. Whenever the VR session
places only. For best results, say phone numbers as
is cancelled, a double beep is played to
single digits.
indicate you have exited the system. Example: 1-800-662-6200

06/29/07—debbie ੭

4. The system announces the current language
PHONE/END and gives you the option to change the lan-
Press the button to cancel a VR guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in
French). Use the following chart to select
session or end a call.
the language.
GETTING STARTED
NOTE:
The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone You must press the button or
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad- the button within 5 seconds to
ditional command options, refer to “List of voice change the language.
commands” later in this section.
Press Press
Current
Choosing a language language
(PHONE/SEND) (PHONE/END)
to select to select
You can interact with the Bluetoothா Hands-Free
LHA0639 English Spanish French
Phone System using English, Spanish or French.
CONTROL BUTTONS Spanish English French
To change the language, perform the following.
French English Spanish
The control buttons for the Bluetoothா Hands-
1. Press and hold the button for more
Free Phone System are located on the steering than 5 seconds. 5. If you decide not to change the language, do
wheel. not press either button. After 5 seconds, the
PHONE/SEND 2. The system announces: “Press the VR session will end, and the language will
PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the not be changed.
Press the button to initiate a VR hands-free phone system to enter the
session or answer an incoming call. speaker adaptation mode or press the
PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-
You can also use the button to ferent language.”
skip through system feedback and to 3. Press the button.
enter commands during a call. See “List
of voice commands” and “During a call” For information on speaker adaptation, see
“Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” later in this
later in this section for more information. section.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

Pairing procedure 4. Say: “New phone” ᭺. The system acknowl-
C 6. The system asks you to assign a priority level
edges the command and asks you to initiate ᭺. The priority level determines which
F
NOTE: pairing from the phone handset ᭺.
D phone is active when more than one paired
Bluetoothா phone is in the vehicle. Follow
The pairing procedure must be performed The pairing procedure of the cellular phone
the instructions provided by the system or
when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle varies according to each cellular phone
refer to “Setup” later in this section for more
starts moving during the procedure, the model. See the cellular phone Owner’s
information on changing priorities.
procedure will be cancelled. Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc- 7. The system will ask if you would like to select
Main Menu tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel- a custom ring tone ᭺. Follow the instruc-
G
“Setup” ᭺
A lular phones. tions provided by the system or refer to
“Pair phone” ᭺
B “Setup” later in this section for more infor-
When prompted for a Passkey code, enter
mation on selecting ringtones.
“New phone” ᭺
C “1234” from the handset. The Passkey code
Initiate from handset ᭺
D “1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and Making a call by entering a phone
cannot be changed. number
Name phone ᭺
E
5. The system asks you to say a name for the
Assign priority ᭺
F
phone ᭺.
E
Choose ringtone ᭺
G Main Menu
If the name is too long or too short, the
1. Press the button on the steering “Call” ᭺
A
system tells you, then prompts you for a
wheel. The system announces the available name again. Number (speak digits) ᭺
B
commands. “Dial” ᭺
C
Also, if more than one phone is paired and
2. Say: “Setup” ᭺. The system acknowledges
A the name sounds too much like a name 1. Press the button on steering wheel. A
the command and announces the next set of already used, the system tells you, then tone will sound.
available commands. prompts you for a name again.
2. Say: “Call” ᭺. The system acknowledges
A
3. Say: “Pair phone” ᭺. The system acknowl-
B
the command and announces the next set of
edges the command and announces the available commands.
next set of available commands.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

3. Say the number you wish to call ᭺. For
B LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS When you get used to the menus in the system,
example, 555-1212 can be said as “five five you can talk ahead by saying more than one
five one two one two.” See “How to say command at a time. For example, say, “Call five
numbers” earlier in this section for more Main Menu five five one two one two” or “Memo pad record.”
information.
“Call” Also, when you get used to the system re-
4. When you have finished speaking the phone “Phone Book” sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone by
number, the system repeats it back and an- pressing the button on the steering wheel.
nounces the available commands. “Memo Pad”
However, if you press the button when the
“Setup”
5. Say: “Dial” ᭺. The system acknowledges
C system is waiting for a response from you it will
the command and makes the call. When you press and release the button on end the VR session.
For additional command options, see “List of the steering wheel, you can choose from the “Call”
voice commands” later in this section. commands on the Main Menu. The following
pages describe these commands and the com-
Receiving a call mands in each sub-menu.
Main Menu
When you hear the ring tone, press the Remember to wait for the tone before “Call”
button on the steering wheel. speaking.
Name (speak name) ᭺
A
Once the call has ended, press the button You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands
Number (speak digits) ᭺
B
on the steering wheel. currently available any time the system is waiting
for a response. “Redial” ᭺
C
NOTE: “Call Back” ᭺
D
If you want to end an action without completing it,
If you do not wish to take the call when you you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the Name (speak name) ᭺
A
hear the ring tone, press the button system is waiting for a response. The system will
on the steering wheel. end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is If you have stored entries in the Phone Book, you
cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate can dial a number associated with a name and
For additional command options, see “List of
you have exited the system. location.
voice commands” later in this section.
If you want to go back to the previous command, See “Phone book” later in this section to learn
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time how to store entries.
the system is waiting for a response.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

When prompted by the system, say the name of “Call back” ᭺
D The system acknowledges the command
the phone book entry you wish to call. The system and sends the tones associated with the
Use the Call Back command to dial the number of numbers. The system then ends the VR ses-
acknowledges the name.
the last incoming call within the vehicle. sion and returns to the call.
If there are multiple locations associated with the
The system acknowledges the command, re- ● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-
name, the system asks you to choose the loca-
peats the number and begins dialing. mand to transfer the call from the Bluetoothா
tion.
If a call back number does not exist, the system Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular
Once you have confirmed the name and location, announces, “There is no number to call back” and phone when privacy is desired.
the system begins the call. ends the VR session. The system announces, “Transfer call. Call
Number (speak digits) ᭺
B During a call transferred to privacy mode.” The system
then ends the VR session.
When prompted by the system, say the number During a call there are several command options
you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers” available. Press the button on the steering You can also issue the Transfer Call com-
and “Making a call by entering a phone number” wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter command again to return to a hands-free call
earlier in this section for more details. mands. through the vehicle.
“Redial” ᭺
C ● “Help” — The system announces the avail- ● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute
able commands. your voice so the other party cannot hear it.
Use the Redial command to call the last number Use the mute command again to unmute
that was dialed within the vehicle. ● “Go back/Correction” — The system an- your voice.
nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session
NOTE: and returns to the call. NOTE:
The system will not redial the last number ● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces If a call is ended or the cellular phone
dialed by the handset keypad. “Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns network connection is lost while the Mute
to the call. feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset
The system acknowledges the command, re- to “off” for the next call so the other party
peats the number and begins dialing. ● “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send
command to enter numbers during a call. For can hear your voice.
If a redial number does not exist, the system example, if you were directed to dial an ex-
announces, “There is no number to redial” and tension by an automated system:
ends the VR session.
Say: “Send one two three four.”

06/29/07—debbie ੭

“Phone book” When prompted by the system, say the name you number will be transferred from the cellular
would like to give the new entry. phone via the Bluetoothா communication link.
NOTE: For example, say: “Mary.” The transfer procedure varies according to each
Phone book commands are not available If the name is too long or too short, the system cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
when the vehicle is moving. tells you, then prompts you for a name again. Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
Main Menu Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts
“Phone Book” recommended cellular phones.
you for a name again.
“New Entry” ᭺
A The system repeats the number and prompts you
Once the system accepts the name and you
“Edit” ᭺
B
confirm it is correct, the system asks for a location
for the next command. When you have finished
“Delete” ᭺ entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose
C (Home, Office, Mobile or Other).
“Store.”
ЉList Names” ᭺
D For example, say: “Home.”
The system confirms the name, location and
The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each The system acknowledges the location.
number. The system then asks if you would like to
phone paired with the system. Each name can The system will ask you to say a phone number or store another location for the same name. If you
have up to 4 locations/phone numbers associ- to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular do not wish to store another location, the system
ated with it. phone’s memory. ends the VR session.
NOTE: Enter a phone number by voice command: “Edit” ᭺
B

Each phone has its own separate phone For example, say: “five five five one two one two.” Use the Edit command to alter an existing phone
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone See “How to say numbers” earlier in this section book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phone
book if you are currently connected with for more information. number to an existing entry.
Phone B. To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular When prompted by the system, say the name of
“New entry” ᭺
A phone’s memory: the entry you wish to edit.
Use the New Entry command to store a new Say ЉTransfer entry.Љ The system acknowledges The system acknowledges the name and asks
name in the system. the command and asks you to initiate the transfer you for the location you would like to edit.
from the phone handset. The new contact phone
Say the name of the location.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

The system acknowledges the location. “Delete” ᭺
C You can stop the playback of the list at any time
by pressing the button on the steering
The system will ask you to say a phone number or Use the Delete command to erase one entry from
wheel. The system ends the VR session.
to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular the phone book, all entries from the phone book,
phone’s memory. the current redial number or the current call back “Memo pad”
number.
Enter a phone number by voice command:
To delete entries from the phone book, say a
For example, say: “five five five one two one two. Main Menu
” See “How to say numbers” earlier in this section name or “All entries” when prompted by the sys-
tem. “Memo Pad”
for more information.
The system acknowledges the command and “Record” ᭺
A
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory: asks you to confirm the deletion. “Play” ᭺
B

To delete the current redial number or call back “Delete” ᭺
C
Say ЉTransfer entry.Љ The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer number, say “redial number” or “call back num- The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voice
from the phone handset. The new contact phone ber” when prompted by the system. memos, each up to 20 seconds long.
number will be transferred from the cellular
If a redial number or a call back number exists, the “Record” ᭺
A
phone via the Bluetoothா communication link.
system deletes them without asking for confirma-
The transfer procedure varies according to each tion. The system announces “Recording” and a tone
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s sounds, signaling you to begin.
If there is no number for the entry you are trying to
Manual for details. You can also visit
delete, the system says so and ends the VR Speak the information you wish to record clearly.
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
session. When you are done, press the or
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
recommended cellular phones. “List names” ᭺
D button on the steering wheel.

The system repeats the number and prompts you Use the List Names command to hear all the A tone sounds and the system announces
for the next command. When you have finished names and locations in the phone book. “Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to end
entering numbers, choose “Store.” the VR session.
The system recites the phone book entries but
The system confirms the name, location and does not include the actual phone numbers. If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you wish
number, then announces that the entry has been When the playback of the list is complete, the to record over the oldest memo.
stored. The system then ends the VR session. system goes back to the main menu.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

“Play” ᭺
B Use the Setup command to change options as- ● “Replace phone” — The system announces
sociated with the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone the names of the phones already paired and
The system plays back all the memos in the order
System. asks which you would like to replace.
of newest to oldest. The system ends the VR
session. “Pair phone” ᭺
A Once you say the name of the phone you
wish to replace, the pairing procedure will
If there are no memos recorded, the system an- Use the Pair Phone command to pair a phone to
begin. Refer to “Pairing procedure” earlier in
nounces “No messages to play.” The system the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System.
this section.
ends the VR session.
NOTE: ● “List phone” – See the description below.
“Delete” ᭺
C
The pairing procedure must be performed “List phone” ᭺
B
The Delete command erases all memos. The when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle
system asks you to confirm this action before starts moving during the procedure, the Use the List Phone command to hear the names
deleting all memos. procedure will be cancelled. Also, see of the phones currently paired. If no phones are
“Pairing procedure” earlier in this section paired, the system announces, “No paired
“Setup” phones to list.” The system then ends the VR
for additional information.
session.
Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair a
Main Menu sixth phone, the system announces that you must “Select phone” ᭺
C

“Setup” first delete one phone or replace an existing Use the Select Phone command to select a
“Pair Phone” ᭺
A phone. phone of lesser priority when two or more phones
“List Phone” ᭺
B If you try to pair a phone that has already been paired with Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone Sys-
paired to your vehicle’s system, the system an- tem are in the vehicle at the same time.
“Select Phone” ᭺ C
nounces the name the phone is already using. The system asks you to name the phone and
“Change Priority” ᭺
D
The pairing procedure will then be cancelled. confirm the selection.
“Delete Phone” ᭺
E
When prompted by the system, choose from the Once the selection is confirmed, the selected
“Select Ringtone” ᭺
F
following commands: phone remains active until the ignition switch is
“Bluetooth Off” ᭺
G turned OFF or you select a new phone.
● “New phone” — Refer to “Pairing a phone”
earlier in this section.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

“Change priority” ᭺
D The system announces the names of the phones “Bluetooth off” ᭺
G
already paired with the system and their priority
Use the Change Priority command to change the Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off the
level. The system then gives you the option to Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System.
priority level of the active phone.
delete a specific phone, all phones or listen to the
The priority level determines which phone is ac- list again. When the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone Sys-
tive when more than one paired Bluetoothா tem is off, you will not be able to make or receive
Once you choose to delete a phone or all phones, calls using NISSAN Voice Recognition. Also, you
phone is in the vehicle.
the system asks you to confirm this action. will not have access to the Phone Book.
The system states the priority level of the active
phone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3, 4, NOTE: You can still use the Memo Pad and access
5). Setup.
When you delete a phone, the associated
If the new priority level is already being used for phone book for that phone will also be SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE
another phone, the two phones will swap priority deleted. Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-
levels. “Select ringtone” ᭺
F dialect users to train the system to improve rec-
For example, if the current priority levels are: ognition accuracy. By repeating a number of
Use the Select Ringtone command to select the commands, the users can create a voice model of
Priority Level 1 = Phone A tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call is their own voice that is stored in the system. The
Priority Level 2 = Phone B received. system is capable of storing a different speaker
Priority Level 3 = Phone C adaptation model for memory A and memory B.
The system announces the name of the active
and you change the priority level of Phone C to phone and asks you to choose from the following If memory A is available, the system will use
Level 1, then: commands: memory A to store the model. If memory A is in
use and memory B is available, the system will
Priority Level 1 = Phone C ● “Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtone
use memory B to store the model. If both of the
Priority Level 2 = Phone B and asks if you would like to select that tone.
memory locations are in use, the system will ask
Priority Level 3 = Phone A If you say “No”, the system plays the next
the user to select which memory location should
ringtone available and continues to cycle
be overwritten.
“Delete phone” ᭺
E through the ringtones until you select one or
quit.
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a
specific phone or all phones from the Bluetoothா ● “Silent” — The system asks you to confirm
Hands-Free Phone System. your wish to disable the ringtone.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

Training procedure 8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the ● setup pair phone
instructions provided by the system.
The procedure for training a voice is as follows. ● memo pad play
9. When training is finished, the system will tell
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet ● eight pause nine three two pause seven
you an adequate number of phrases have
outdoor location. been recorded. ● delete all entries
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run- 10. The system will ask you to say your name. ● call seven two four zero nine
ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis- Follow the instructions to register your
sion in P (Park). ● phone book delete entry
name.
3. Press and hold the button for more ● memo pad record
11. The system will announce that speaker ad-
than 5 seconds. aptation has been completed and the sys- ● dial star two one seven oh
4. The system announces: “Press the tem is ready.
● Yes
PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the The SA mode will stop if:
hands-free phone system to enter the ● No
speaker adaptation mode or press the ● The button is pressed for more than 5
● select ring tone
PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif- seconds in SA mode.
ferent language.” ● dial eight five six nine two
● The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.
5. Press the button. ● Bluetooth on
● The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or
For information on selecting a different lan- LOCK position. ● setup change priority
guage, see “Choosing a language” earlier in
this section. Training phrases ● call three one nine oh two
6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected During the SA mode, the system instructs the ● nine seven pause pause three oh eight
automatically. If both memory locations are trainer to say the following phrases. (The system ● Cancel
already in use, the system will prompt you to will prompt you for each phrase.)
overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro- ● call back number
● phone book new entry
vided by the system.
● call star two zero nine five
● dial three oh four two nine
7. When preparation is complete and you are
ready to begin, the press the button. ● delete call back number ● delete phone


06/29/07—debbie ੭

● dial eight three zero five one
● Home
● four three pause two nine pause zero
● delete redial number
● phone book list names
● call eight oh five four one
● Correction
● setup change ring tone
● dial seven four oh one eight
● setup main menu
● Delete
● dial nine seven two six six
● memo pad delete
● call seven six three oh one
● go back
● call five six two eight zero
● dial six six four three seven


06/29/07—debbie ੭

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until
the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” earlier in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

System fails to interpret the command correctly. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-
prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” earlier in this section.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the using the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” earlier in this section.
phone book.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

MEMO


5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Traction Control System (TCS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Nissan vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Rear sonar system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

06/29/07—debbie ੭

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING

WARNING ● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are a. The vehicle is raised for service.
entering the vehicle, drive with all win-
● Do not leave children or adults who b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
dows fully open, and have the vehicle
would normally require the assistance entering into the passenger
inspected immediately.
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets compartment.
should also not be left alone. They ● Do not run the engine in closed spaces
c. You notice a change in the sound of
could accidentally injure themselves or such as a garage.
the exhaust system.
others through inadvertent operation of ● Do not park the vehicle with the engine
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, d. You have had an accident involving
running for any extended length of time.
temperatures in a closed vehicle could damage to the exhaust system, un-
quickly become high enough to cause ● Keep the lift gate and rear vent windows derbody, or rear of the vehicle.
severe or possibly fatal injuries to closed while driving, otherwise exhaust
people or animals. gases could be drawn into the passen- THREE-WAY CATALYST
ger compartment. If you must drive with
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or The three-way catalyst is an emission control
the lift gate or rear vent windows open,
straps to help prevent it from sliding or follow these precautions: device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col- 1. Open all the windows. high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
lision, unsecured cargo could cause 2. Set the air recirculation but-
personal injury. ton to off and the fan control dial to WARNING
high to circulate the air. ● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
● If electrical wiring or other cable con- tem are very hot. Keep people, animals
nections must pass to a trailer through or flammable materials away from the
WARNING
the seal on the lift gate or the body, exhaust system components.
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they follow the manufacturer’s recommen- ● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
contain colorless and odorless carbon dation to prevent carbon monoxide en- flammable materials such as dry grass,
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger- try into the vehicle. waste paper or rags. They may ignite
ous. It can cause unconsciousness or
● The exhaust system and body should be and cause a fire.
death.
inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:

5-2 Starting and driving

06/29/07—debbie ੭

CAUTION TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
SYSTEM (TPMS) TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
from leaded gasoline will seriously re- Each tire, including the spare (if provided), function indicator is combined with the low tire
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to should be checked monthly when cold and in- pressure telltale. When the system detects a
help reduce exhaust pollutants. flated to the inflation pressure recommended by malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard mately one minute and then remain continuously
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
electrical systems can cause overrich tires of a different size than the size indicated on subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, function exists. When the malfunction indicator is
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv- you should determine the proper tire inflation illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
ing if the engine misfires, or if notice- pressure for those tires.) or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
able loss of performance or other un- malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
usual operating conditions are including the installation of replacement or alter-
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
detected. Have the vehicle inspected nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
promptly by a NISSAN dealer. the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-
● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-
level. Running out of fuel could cause telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
the engine to misfire, damaging the tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
three-way catalyst. proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under- wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead properly.
● Do not race the engine while warming it
to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
up. Additional information:
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start cle’s handling and stopping ability. ● The TPMS does not monitor the tire pres-
the engine. sure of the spare tire.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s ● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to km/h). Also, this system may not detect a
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a
telltale. flat tire while driving).
Starting and driving 5-3

06/29/07—debbie ੭

● The low tire pressure warning light does not For additional information, see “Low tire pressure ● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
automatically turn off when the tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” is replaced, tire pressure will not be
is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System indicated, the TPMS will not function
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be (TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section. and the low tire pressure warning light
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) will flash for approximately 1 minute.
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire WARNING The light will remain on after 1 minute.
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
gauge to check the tire pressure. ● If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden possible for tire replacement and/or
● Tire pressure rises and falls depending on steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, system resetting.
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road ● Replacing tires with those not originally
and the outside temperature. Low outside to a safe location and stop the vehicle specified by NISSAN could affect the
temperature can lower the temperature of as soon as possible. Driving with under- proper operation of the TPMS.
the air inside the tire which can cause a inflated tires may permanently damage
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the tires and increase the likelihood of ● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
the low tire pressure warning light to illumi- tire failure. Serious vehicle damage tire sealant into the tires, as this may
nate. If the warning light illuminates in low could occur and may lead to an acci- cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
ambient temperature, check the tire pres- dent and could result in serious per- sensors.
sure for all four tires. sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to CAUTION
● You can also check the pressure of all tires
(except the spare tire) on the display screen. the recommended COLD tire pressure Do not place metalized film or any metal
The order of the tire pressure figures dis- shown on the Tire and Loading Informa- parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This
played on the screen does not correspond tion label to turn the low tire pressure may cause poor reception of the signals
with the actual order of the tire position. See warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, from the tire pressure sensors, and the
“Tire pressure information” in the “Display replace it with a spare tire as soon as TPMS will not function properly.
screen, heater, air conditioner and audio and possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case
phone systems” section. of emergency” section for changing a Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
flat tire.) interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-
minate.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

Some examples are: AVOIDING COLLISION AND DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio ROLLOVER DRIVING
frequencies are near the vehicle.
WARNING WARNING
– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle. Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe Never drive under the influence of alcohol
and prudent manner may result in loss of or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-
– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a duces coordination, delays reaction time
control or an accident.
DC/AC converter is being used in or near the and impairs judgement. Driving after
vehicle. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey drinking alcohol increases the likelihood
FCC Notice: all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, of being involved in an accident injuring
high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma- yourself and others. Additionally, if you
Changes or modifications not expressly ap- neuvers, because these driving practices could are injured in an accident, alcohol can
proved by the party responsible for compli- cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with increase the severity of the injury.
ance could void the user’s authority to op- any vehicle, loss of control could result in a
erate the equipment. collision with other vehicles or objects, or NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if you must choose not to drive under the influence
This device complies with Part 15 of the
the loss of control causes the vehicle to of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-
Canada.
avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under though the local laws vary on what is considered
Operation is subject to the following two the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre- to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
conditions: (1) This device may not cause scription or over-the-counter drugs which may affects all people differently and most people
harmful interference, and (2) this device cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as underestimate the effects of alcohol.
must accept any interference received, in- outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And
cluding interference that may cause undes- supplemental restraint system” section of this that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-
ired operation of the device. manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so. scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-
and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
or improperly belted person is significantly
more likely to be injured or killed than a
person properly wearing a seat belt.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

IGNITION SWITCH

1. Move the shift selector lever into the P (Park)
WARNING
position.
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK
position while driving. The steering wheel 2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ON
will lock. This may cause the driver to lose position.
control of the vehicle and could result in 3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.
serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
4. Remove the key.
The shift selector lever is designed so it cannot
be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other
gear positions if the ignition key is turned to OFF
position or if the key is removed from the switch.
The shift selector lever can be moved if the
ignition switch is in the ON position and the
WSD0041
foot brake pedal is depressed.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION There is an OFF position between the
The ignition lock is designed so the key cannot be LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position
turned to the LOCK position and removed until is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.
the shift selector lever is moved to the P (Park) When the ignition is in the OFF position,
position. the steering wheel is not locked.

When removing the key from the ignition, make In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it
sure the shift selector lever is in the P (Park) must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise
from the straight up position.
position.
To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to
If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park)
the LOCK position. Remove the key. To
position, the key cannot be moved to the LOCK unlock the steering wheel, insert the key
position. and turn it gently while rotating the steer-
When the key cannot be turned to the LOCK ing wheel slightly right and left.
position, proceed as follows to remove the key.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

KEY POSITIONS 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position ● Make sure the area around the vehicle is
for approximately 5 seconds. clear.
LOCK: Normal parking position (0)
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK ● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-
OFF: (Not used) (1) position, and wait approximately 10 sec- ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as
ACC: (Accessories) (2) onds. frequently as possible, or at least whenever
you refuel.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
This position activates electrical accessories
● Check that all windows and lights are clean.
such as the radio when the engine is not running. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference) ● Visually inspect tires for their appearance
ON: Normal operating position (3) separate from the registered key. and condition. Also check tires for proper
This position turns on the ignition system and the inflation.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
electrical accessories. ommends placing the registered key on a sepa- ● Lock all doors.
START: (4) rate key ring to avoid interference from other
● Position seat and adjust head restraints.
devices.
This position starts the engine. As soon as the ● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
engine has started, release the key. It automati-
cally returns to the ON position. ● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER ● Check the operation of warning lights when
SYSTEM the key is turned to the ON (3) position. See
“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
minders” in the “Instruments and controls”
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
cedures:

06/29/07—debbie ੭

STARTING THE ENGINE DRIVING THE VEHICLE

1. Apply the parking brake. cranking the engine, release the accel- AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
erator pedal. Crank the engine with your
2. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N foot off the accelerator pedal by turn-
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended. WARNING
ing the ignition key to START. Release the
The shift selector lever cannot be key when the engine starts. If the engine ● Do not depress the accelerator pedal
starts, but fails to run, repeat the above while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
moved out of P (Park) and into any of
procedure. tral) to R (Reverse), or L (Low). Always
the other gear positions if the ignition
depress the brake pedal until shifting is
key is turned to the OFF position or if
CAUTION completed. Failure to do so could cause
the key is removed from the ignition
you to lose control and have an
switch. Do not operate the starter for more than accident.
The starter is designed not to operate if 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, turn the key off and wait 10 ● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
the shift selector lever is in any of the caution when shifting into a forward or
driving positions. seconds before cranking again, otherwise
the starter could be damaged. reverse gear before the engine has
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the warmed up.
accelerator pedal by turning the ignition 4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-
● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)
key to START. Release the key when the onds after starting. Do not race the engine
while the vehicle is moving. This could
engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to while warming it up. Drive at moderate
cause an accident.
run, repeat the above procedure. speed for a short distance first, especially in
cold weather.
● If the engine is very hard to start in ex- CAUTION
tremely cold weather or when restarting, In cold weather, keep the engine running for
a minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting it ● When stopping the vehicle on an uphill
depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-
off. Starting and stopping the engine over a grade, do not hold the vehicle by de-
proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it
short period of time may make the vehicle pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot
and then crank the engine. Release the
more difficult to start. brake should be used for this purpose.
key and the accelerator pedal when the
engine starts. ● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
● If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator The automatic transmission in your vehicle is
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. electronically controlled to produce maximum
Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After power and smooth operation.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

The recommended operating procedures for this
WARNING
transmission are shown on the following pages.
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle Apply the parking brake if the selector
performance and driving enjoyment. lever is in any position while the engine is
not running. Failure to do so could cause
Starting the vehicle the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the away and result in serious personal injury
foot brake pedal before moving the shift or property damage.
selector lever out of the P (Park) position. If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position for
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or
move the shift selector lever into a driving any D (Drive) position, the shift selector lever
gear. cannot be moved to P (Park). Additionally, the key
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start cannot be turned to the LOCK position and be
the vehicle in motion. WSD0161 removed from the ignition switch. If this occurs,
perform the following steps:
The automatic transmission is designed so To move the selector lever:
the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed 1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is
Push the button while depressing the brake
before shifting from P (Park) to any drive pedal
stopped.
position while the ignition switch is in the Push the button to shift 2. Turn the key to the ON position.
ON position.
Shift without pushing button 3. Depress the foot brake pedal.
The shift selector lever cannot be moved
out of P (Park) and into any of the other Shifting
gear positions if the ignition key is turned
to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
key is removed. pedal and move the shift selector lever out of the
P (Park) position.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

4. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make
(Neutral) to restart the vehicle (P is pre- sure the vehicle is completely stopped before
ferred). Move the shift selector lever to P selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake
(Park) to park the vehicle and turn the igni- pedal must be depressed to move the se-
tion key to the LOCK position to remove the lector lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or
key. any drive position to R (Reverse).
P (Park): N (Neutral):
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The
CAUTION engine can be started in this position. You may
Use the P (Park) position only when the shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine
vehicle is completely stopped. while the vehicle is moving.
Use the P (Park) selector position when the ve- D (Drive):
hicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make Use this position for all normal forward driving. WSD0162
sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The
brake pedal should be depressed to move L (Low gear): Shift lock release
the selector lever from N (Neutral) or any Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly If the battery is discharged, the shift selector lever
drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking or slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud, may not be moved from the P (Park) position even
brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill with the brake pedal depressed.
brake first, then shift the selector lever into the P grades.
(Park) position. To move the shift selector lever, release the shift
Do not shift into the L position at speeds above lock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N
R (Reverse): 65 MPH (105 km/h). Do not exceed 65 MPH (Neutral). However, the steering wheel will be
(105 km/h) in the L position. locked unless the ignition switch is turned to the
CAUTION ON position. This allows the vehicle to be moved
Use the R (Reverse) position only when if the battery is discharged.
the vehicle is completely stopped.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

To push the shift lock release, complete the fol- Accelerator downshift
lowing procedure: — in D position —
1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-
and remove the key erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-
2. Apply the parking brake. sion down into a lower gear, depending on the
vehicle speed.
3. Remove the shift lock release cover as
shown. Fail-safe
4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock When the fail-safe operation occurs, please note
release slot and push down. that the transmission will be locked in any of the
forward gears according to the condition.
5. Move the shift selector lever to the N (Neu-
tral) position while holding down the shift If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-
ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning
lock release. WSD0163
and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe
6. Turn the key to the ON position to unlock the system may be activated. This will occur Overdrive switch
steering wheel. Now the vehicle may be even if all electrical circuits are functioning
properly. In this case, turn the ignition key Each time your vehicle is started, the transmis-
moved to the desired location.
OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the sion is automatically “reset” to overdrive ON.
If the shift selector lever cannot be moved out of key back to the ON position. The vehicle ON: With the engine running and the
P (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto- should return to its normal operating con- shift selector lever in the D (Drive)
matic transmission system as soon as possible. dition. If it does not return to its normal position, the transmission upshifts
operating condition, have a NISSAN dealer
WARNING into Overdrive as vehicle speed
check the transmission and repair it if nec-
essary. increases.
If the selector lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position while the engine is Overdrive does not engage until the engine
running and the brake pedal is depressed, has reached operating temperature.
the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-
ing stop lights could cause an accident
injuring yourself and others.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

PARKING BRAKE

OFF: For driving up and down long WARNING
slopes where engine braking is nec-
essary push the Overdrive switch ● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
leased before driving. Failure to do so
once. The O/D OFF indicator light can cause brake failure and lead to an
in the instrument panel comes on at accident.
this time.
● Do not release the parking brake from
When cruising at a low speed or climbing a outside the vehicle.
gentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shift
shocks as the transmission shifts into and out of ● Do not use the gear shift in place of the
Overdrive repeatedly. In this case, depress the parking brake. When parking, be sure
Overdrive switch to turn the Overdrive off. The the parking brake is fully engaged.
O/D OFF indicator light in the instrument panel ● Do not leave children unattended in a
comes on at this time. vehicle. They could release the parking
When driving conditions change, depress the brake and cause an accident. LSD0158
Overdrive switch to turn the Overdrive on. To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.
Remember not to drive at high speeds for ex- To release:
tended periods of time with the Overdrive off.
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
This reduces fuel economy.
2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it
will release.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

CRUISE CONTROL

● The SET indicator light may blink when the To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to
cruise control switch is turned ON while the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch
pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or and release it. The SET indicator light in the
CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the
control system, use the following proce- accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set
dures. speed.
● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-
WARNING
celerator pedal. When you release the
Do not use the cruise control when driving pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously
under the following conditions: set speed.
● When it is not possible to keep the ● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
vehicle at a set speed. when going up or down steep hills. If this
● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in happens, drive without the cruise control.
LSD0159
speed. To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
1. ACCEL/RES switch following three methods.
● On winding or hilly roads.
2. COAST/SET switch
● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). ● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator
3. CANCEL switch
light in the instrument panel goes out.
4. ON·OFF switch ● In very windy areas.
● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle goes out.
CONTROL control and result in an accident.
● Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE
● If the cruise control system malfunctions, it CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS indicator light and SET indicator light in the
cancels automatically. The SET indicator instrument panel go out.
The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-
light in the instrument panel then blinks to
tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without The cruise control is automatically canceled and
warn the driver. keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:
● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the To turn on the cruise control, push the main ● you depress the brake pedal while pushing
cruise control switch off and have the sys- switch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru- the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.
tem checked by a NISSAN dealer. ment panel comes on. The preset speed is deleted from memory.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH To resume the preset speed, push and re-
CAUTION
(13 km/h) below the set speed. lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-
turns to the last set cruising speed when the During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
● you move the shift selector lever to N (Neu- vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h). follow these recommendations to obtain
tral). maximum engine performance and en-
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one sure the future reliability and economy of
of the following three methods. your new vehicle. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in short-
● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the ened engine life and reduced engine
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and performance.
release the COAST/SET switch.
● Avoid driving for long periods at constant
● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the
When the vehicle attains the speed you de- engine over 4,000 rpm.
sire, release the switch. ● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. ● Avoid quick starts.
Each time you do this, the set speed in-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). ● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one ● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
of the following three methods. (800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-
hicle attains the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it.
● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-
lease the switch when the vehicle slows to
the desired speed.
● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed de-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

06/29/07—debbie ੭

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain ● When cruising at highway speeds, it is more
cruising speeds with a constant accelerator economical to use the air conditioner and
position. leave the windows closed to reduce drag.
● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. ● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy. See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-
tion” in “Technical and consumer informa-
● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.
tion” later in this manual.
Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-
hicles.
● Use a proper gear range which suits road
conditions. On level roads, shift into high
gear as soon as possible.
● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
● Keep your engine tuned up.
● Follow the recommended periodic mainte-
nance schedule.
● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-
sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
● Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-
proper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
● Air conditioner operation lowers fuel
economy. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: ᭺
A

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel
gently touches the curb.
● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: ᭺
B

Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB: ᭺
C

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road
so the vehicle will move away from the cen-
WSD0050
ter of the road if it moves.
WARNING ● Never leave the engine running while 4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position
the vehicle is unattended. and remove the key.
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass, ● Do not leave children unattended inside
waste paper or rags. They may ignite the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
and cause a fire. tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
● Safe parking procedures require that ous accidents.
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park). Fail- 1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
ure to do so could cause the vehicle to
2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)
move unexpectedly or roll away and re-
sult in an accident. Make sure the shift position.
lever has been pushed as far forward as 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
it can go and cannot be moved without traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
depressing the foot brake pedal. practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic The brake system has two separate hydraulic
WARNING
pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at two wheels. ● While driving on a slippery surface, be
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you careful when braking, accelerating or
will still have control of the vehicle. However, BRAKE PRECAUTIONS downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-
much greater steering effort is needed, especially erating could cause the wheels to skid
in sharp turns and at low speeds. Vacuum assisted brakes and result in an accident.
WARNING The brake booster aids braking by using engine ● If the engine is not running or is turned
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the off while driving, the power assist for
If the engine is not running or is turned off vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, the brakes will not work. Braking will be
while driving, the power assist for the greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be harder.
steering will not work. Steering will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-
harder to operate. tance will be longer. Wet brakes
Using the brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the may pull to one side during braking.
brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return
downshift to a lower gear before going down a to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may speeds until the brakes function correctly.
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control. Parking brake break-in
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the
best brake performance.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

This procedure is described in the vehicle service – When installing a spare tire, make WARNING
manual and can be performed by a NISSAN sure that it is the proper size and type
dealer. as specified on the Tire and Loading Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
Information label. See “Tire and may result in increased stopping
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM Loading Information label” in the distances.
(ABS) “Technical and consumer informa- Normal operation
tion” section of this manual.
WARNING The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5
– For detailed information, see
● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte- - 10 km/h).
sophisticated device, but it cannot pre- nance and do-it-yourself” section of When the ABS senses that one or more wheels
vent accidents resulting from careless this manual. are close to locking up, the system electronically
or dangerous driving techniques. It can
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the controls the pressure applied to each brake.
help maintain vehicle control during
braking on slippery surfaces. Remem- brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard This action is similar to pumping the brakes very
ber that stopping distances on slippery braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake
surfaces will be longer than on normal The system detects the rotation speed at each pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis- wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre- feel a vibration from the actuator when it is oper-
tances may also be longer on rough, vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By ating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you preventing each wheel from locking, the system operating properly. However, the pulsation may
are using tire chains. Always maintain a helps the driver maintain steering control and indicate that road conditions are hazardous and
safe distance from the vehicle in front helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip- extra care is required while driving.
of you. Ultimately, the driver is respon- pery surfaces.
sible for safety. Self-test feature
● Tire type and condition may also affect Using the system
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
braking effectiveness. Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De- pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
– When replacing tires, install the press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
specified size of tires on all four but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper- tests the system each time you start the engine
wheels. ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or
the vehicle to avoid obstacles. reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear
a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

06/29/07—debbie ੭

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)

pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a When accelerating on slippery surfaces the tire
WARNING
malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc- may spin or slip. With the vehicle Traction Control
tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the System (TCS), sensors detect these movements ● The Traction Control System is de-
ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The and control the braking and engine output to help signed to help improve driving stability
brake system then operates normally, but without improve vehicle stability while accelerating. but does not prevent accidents due to
anti-lock assistance. abrupt steering operation at high
● When the traction control system is operat- speeds or by careless or dangerous
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the ing, the indicator in the instrument driving techniques. Reduce vehicle
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle panel blinks. speed and be especially careful when
checked by a NISSAN dealer. driving and cornering on slippery sur-
● If the indicator blinks, the vehicle is
faces and always drive carefully.
under slippery conditions. Be sure to drive
carefully. See “Slip indicator light” and “Trac- ● If brake related parts such as brake
tion Control System (TCS) off indicator pads, rotors and calipers are not stan-
light” in the “Instruments and controls” sec- dard equipment or are extremely dete-
tion of this manual. riorated, the Traction Control System
may not operate properly and the
● If a malfunction occurs in the system, indicator light may come on.
the and indicator lights
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
come on in the instrument panel.
If suspension parts such as shock ab-
As long as these lights are on, the traction control sorbers, struts, springs, bushings and
function is canceled. The vehicle will behave like wheels are not standard equipment or
a vehicle without the system. are extremely deteriorated, the Traction
Control System may not operate prop-
erly and the indicator light may
come on.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

● When driving on extremely inclined sur- When accelerating or driving on slippery sur- When the VDC system is operating, you may feel
faces such as higher banked corners, faces, the tires may spin or slide. With the Vehicle a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or
the Traction Control System may not Dynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors detect vibration from under the hood. This is normal and
operate properly and the indica- these movements and control the braking and indicates that the VDC system is working prop-
tor light may come on. Do not drive on engine output to help improve vehicle stability. erly.
these types of roads. ● When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) The computer has a built in diagnostic feature
● If wheels or tires other than the recom- system is operating, the SLIP indicator in that tests the system each time you start the
mended ones are used, the Traction the instrument panel blinks. engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse
Control System may not operate prop- at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you
erly and the indicator light may ● If the SLIP indicator blinks, the road condi-
may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in
come on. tions are slippery. Be sure to adjust your
the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an
speed and driving to these conditions. See
● The Traction Control System is not a indication of a malfunction.
“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle Dynamic
substitute for winter tires or tire chains Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “In-
on a snow covered road. WARNING
struments and controls” section.
● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
● Indicator light designed to help improve driving stabil-
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the ity but does not prevent accidents due
SLIP and indicator lights come on in to abrupt steering operation at high
the instrument panel. speeds or by careless or dangerous
As long as these indicator lights are on, the driving techniques. Reduce vehicle
traction control function is canceled. speed and be especially careful when
driving and cornering on slippery sur-
If the vehicle is operated with the Vehicle Dy-
faces and always drive carefully.
namic Control system OFF using the VDC OFF
switch, VDC functions will be turned off. The
VDC system will still try to transfer power from a
slipping drive wheel to one with more traction
when the VDC system switch is OFF. The SLIP
indicator will flash if wheel spin is detected. The
ABS will still operate with the VDC system off.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if so
equipped)

● If brake related parts such as brake ● If wheels or tires other than the recom-
pads, rotors and calipers are not stan- mended ones are used, the Vehicle Dy-
dard equipment or are extremely dete- namic Control system may not operate
riorated, the Vehicle Dynamic Control properly and the Vehicle Dynamic Con-
system may not operate properly and trol off indicator light may come on.
the Vehicle Dynamic Control off indica-
● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
tor light may come on.
not a substitute for winter tires or tire
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. chains on a snow covered road.
If suspension parts such as shock ab-
sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN
approved for your vehicle or are ex-
tremely deteriorated the Vehicle Dy-
namic Control system may not operate LSD0088
properly. This could adversely affect ve-
hicle handling performance, and the WARNING
VDC OFF indicator light may come on.
● Always turn and look back before back-
● When driving on extremely inclined sur- ing up. The RSS is not a substitute for
faces such as higher banked corners, proper backing procedures.
the Vehicle Dynamic Control system
may not operate properly and the VDC ● Read and understand the limitations of
OFF indicator light may come on. Do the rear sonar system as contained in
not drive on these types of roads. this section. Inclement weather may af-
fect the function of the RSS; this may
● When driving on an unstable surface include reduced performance or a false
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or activation.
ramp, the Vehicle Dynamic Control off
indicator light may illuminate. This is ● This system is not designed to prevent
not a malfunction. Restart the engine contact with small or moving objects.
after driving onto a stable surface.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

● The system is designed as an aid to the will sound for only three seconds. Once the sys- FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
driver in detecting large stationary ob- tem detects an object approaching, the tone will
sound again. To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-
jects to help avoid damaging the ve- icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
hicle. The system will not detect small The RSS automatically turns on when the shift frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key
objects below the bumper, and may not selector lever is placed in R (Reverse) and the hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if so
detect objects close to the bumper or ignition is ON. The RSS OFF switch on the equipped).
on the ground. instrument panel allows the driver to turn the RSS
● If your vehicle sustains damage to the on and off. To turn the RSS off, the ignition must ANTI-FREEZE
rear bumper fascia, leaving it mis- be ON, and the shift selector lever in R (Reverse).
In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-
aligned or bent, the sensing zone may An indicator light on the switch will illuminate
perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the
be altered causing inaccurate measure- when the system is turned off. If the indicator light
anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.
ment of obstacles or false alarms. illuminates when the RSS is not turned off, it may
For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the
indicate a failure in the RSS.
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
The Rear Sonar System (RSS) sounds a tone to manual.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear
warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large
when the shift selector is in R (Reverse). The accumulations of dirt (do not clean the sensors BATTERY
system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it If the battery is not fully charged during extremely
mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular will affect the accuracy of the RSS. cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may
or moving objects. freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-
The RSS detects obstacles up to 6 feet (1.8 m) mum efficiency, the battery should be checked
from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-
area at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer to tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
the illustration for approximate zone coverage manual.
areas). As you move closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the tone increases. When the obstacle is
less than 10 inches (25.0 cm) away, the tone will
sound continuously. If the RSS detects a station-
ary or receding object further than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle, the tone


06/29/07—debbie ੭

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER 3. Tire chains may be used. For details see ● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-
“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it- tion. Accelerate and slow down with
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti- yourself” section of this manual. care. If accelerating or downshifting too
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the
fast, the drive wheels will lose even
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT more traction.
For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the
It is recommended that the following items be ● Allow more stopping distance under
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
carried in the vehicle during winter: these conditions. Braking should be
manual.
● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove started sooner than on dry pavement.
TIRE EQUIPMENT ice and snow from the windows and wiper ● Allow greater following distances on
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to blades. slippery roads.
provide superior performance on dry pave- ● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the ● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
ment. However, the performance of these jack to give it firm support. These may appear on an otherwise
tires will be substantially reduced in snowy clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of
and icy conditions. If you operate your ve- ● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-
hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom- ● Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser- ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,
mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL voir tank. and avoid any sudden steering
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please maneuvers.
consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE ● Do not use the cruise control on slip-
size, speed rating and availability informa- pery roads.
tion. WARNING
● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded ● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
tires may be used. However, some U.S. very cold snow or ice can be slick and clear of the exhaust pipe and from
states and Canadian provinces prohibit their very hard to drive on. The vehicle will around your vehicle.
use. Check local, state and provincial laws have much less traction or “grip” under
before installing studded tires. these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until the road is salted or
Skid and traction capabilities of studded sanded.
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so To use the engine block heater:
equipped) 1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block
WARNING
heater cord.
● Do not use your engine block heater
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
with an ungrounded electrical system
grounded 3 wire, 3 pronged extension cord.
or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-
riously injured by an electrical shock if 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
you use an ungrounded connection. Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-
● Disconnect and properly store the en- volt AC (VAC) outlet.
gine block heater cord before starting 5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
the engine. Damage to the cord could for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside
result in an electrical shock and can temperatures, to properly warm the engine
cause serious injury. coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the
● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex- engine block heater on.
tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-
the extension cord into a Ground Fault erly store the cord to keep it away from
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded moving parts.
110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the
proper extension cord or a grounded
outlet can result in a fire or electrical
shock and cause serious personal
injury.
Engine block heaters are available through
NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature
starting. The engine block heater should be used
when the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) or
lower.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

06/29/07—debbie ੭

FLAT TIRE

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING WARNING ● Replacing tires with those not originally
SYSTEM (TPMS) ● If the low tire pressure warning light
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres- steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, ● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
sure of all tires except the spare. When the low reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road tire sealant into the tires, as this may
tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of to a safe location and stop the vehicle cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
your tires is significantly under-inflated. If as soon as possible. Driving with under- sensors.
equipped, the system also displays pressure of inflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
all tires (except the spare tire) on the display
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-
screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is
could occur and may lead to an acci-
installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being low.
dent and could result in serious per-
driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will acti- sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for
vate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure Stopping the vehicle
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
warning light. This system will activate only when the recommended COLD tire pressure 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH shown on the Tire and Loading Informa- away from traffic.
(25 km/h). For more details, refer to tion label to turn the low tire pressure
“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders” 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
pressure information” in the “Display screen, possible. brake. Move the shift selector lever to P
heater, air conditioner and audio systems” sec- (Park).
tion and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System is replaced, tire pressure will not be
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section. 4. Turn off the engine.
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
will flash for approximately 1 minute. signal professional road assistance person-
The light will remain on after 1 minute. nel that you need assistance.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting. and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.

6-2 In case of emergency

06/29/07—debbie ੭

WARNING
● Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the automatic transmission
is shifted into P (Park).
● Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-
sional road assistance.

WCE0044 LCE0078
Blocking wheels Getting the spare tire and tools
Place suitable blocks ᭺ at both the front and
1 1. Tip up the passenger side second row cap-
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire tain’s chair. Refer to “Tip up for easy entry to
᭺ to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
2 3rd row” in the “Safety — seats, seat belts
jacked up. and supplemental restraint system” section
of this owner’s manual.
WARNING 2. Lift up the floor carpeting and remove the
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle jack.
may move and result in personal injury.

In case of emergency 6-3

06/29/07—debbie ੭

6. Turn the retainer counterclockwise and re-
move the spare tire.
Removing wheel cover (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-
sult in personal injury.
Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or
wheel surface.

WSD0085

Jacking up vehicle and removing the
damaged tire
WARNING
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-
essary to work under the vehicle, sup-
LCE0079
port it with safety stands.
3. Stow the center tray table (if so equipped).
● Use only the jack provided with your
4. Move both front seats as forward as pos- vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the
sible. jack provided with your vehicle on other
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
5. Lift up the floor carpeting ᭺. Remove the
1
only your vehicle during a tire change.
spare tire cover ᭺ and jack tool kit.
2


06/29/07—debbie ੭

● Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
● Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
● Never use blocks on or under the jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for vehicles with limited slip
differentials.
● Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack. WCE0081

● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off Always refer to the proper illustrations for the 2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
the ground. It may cause the vehicle to correct placement and jack-up points for your point as illustrated so the top of the jack
move. specific vehicle model and jack type. contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the two
Carefully read the caution label attached to notches in the front or the rear as shown.
the jack body and the following instruc- Also fit the groove of the jack head between
tions. the notches as shown.
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by The jack should be used on firm and
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut level ground.
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
until the tire is off the ground.
and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the
vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-
move the wheel nuts, and then remove the
tire.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
parked for three hours or more or driven
in the sequence illustrated (᭺, ᭺, ᭺, ᭺,
A B C D
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
᭺). Lower the vehicle completely.
E
COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire
WARNING and Loading Information label affixed to
● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly the driver side center pillar.
tightened wheel nuts can cause the After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD
wheel to become loose or come off. tire pressure, the display of the tire pres-
This could cause an accident. sure information may show higher pres-
● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel sure than the COLD tire pressure after the
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile
WCE0056 to become loose. (1.6 km). This is because the tire pressure
Installing the spare tire increases as the tire temperature rises.
● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-
hicle has been driven for 600 miles This does not indicate a system malfunc-
The spare tire is designed for emergency (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, tion.
use. See specific instructions under the etc.). 5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-
ment in the vehicle.
nance and do-it-yourself” section of this As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts
manual. to the specified torque with a torque
wrench.
WARNING
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-
● Always make sure that the spare tire
tween the wheel and hub. Wheel nut tightening torque: and jacking equipment are properly se-
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten 83 ft-lb (112 N·m) cured after use. Such items can become
the wheel nuts finger tight. dangerous projectiles in an accident or
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to sudden stop.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel specification at all times. It is recom-
nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
they are tight. specifications at each lubrication interval.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

JUMP STARTING

● The spare tire is designed for emer- To start your engine with a booster battery, the ● Whenever working on or near a battery,
gency use. See specific instructions un- instructions and precautions below must be fol- always wear suitable eye protectors (for
der the heading “Wheels and tires” in lowed. example, goggles or industrial safety
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” spectacles) and remove rings, metal
section of this manual. WARNING bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
● If done incorrectly, jump starting can over the battery when jump starting.
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in ● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
severe injury or death. It could also battery. It could explode and cause se-
damage your vehicle. rious injury.
● Explosive hydrogen gas is always ● Your vehicle has an automatic engine
present in the vicinity of the battery. cooling fan. It could come on at any
Keep all sparks and flames away from time. Keep hands and other objects
the battery. away from it.
● Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-
rosive sulfuric acid solution which can
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
come into contact with anything, imme-
diately flush the contacted area with
water.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
● The booster battery must be rated at 12
volts. Use of an improperly rated battery
can damage your vehicle.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

● Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine com-
partment and that the cable clamps do
not contact any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and
let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-
hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-
gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
WCE0054 more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so not start right away, turn the key off and
WARNING wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
equipped). Cover the battery with an old
Always follow the instructions below. cloth to reduce explosion hazard. 7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-
Failure to do so could result in damage to nect the negative cable and then the positive
the charging system and cause personal 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-
cable.
injury. lustrated (᭺, ᭺, ᭺, ᭺).
A B C D
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, CAUTION sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
position the two vehicles to bring their bat- the vent holes as it may be contaminated
● Always connect positive (ϩ) to positive
teries near each other. with corrosive acid.
(ϩ) and negative (Ϫ) to body ground (for
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. example, strut mounting bolt, engine
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-
lector lever to P (Park). Switch off all unnec-
essary electrical systems (lights, heater, air
conditioner, etc.).

06/29/07—debbie ੭

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
CAUTION
extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
Automatic transmission models cannot you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-
be push-started or tow-started. Attempt- noise, etc. take the following steps. ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not
ing to do so may cause transmission open the hood further until no steam or
damage. WARNING coolant can be seen.
● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle 4. Open the engine hood.
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a vehicle fire. WARNING
● To avoid the danger of being scalded, If steam or water is coming from the en-
never remove the radiator cap while the gine, stand clear to prevent getting
engine is still hot. When the radiator burned.
cap is removed, pressurized hot water
will spurt out, possibly causing serious 5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
injury. looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
● Do not open the hood if steam is com- running. The radiator hoses and radiator
ing out. should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-
the parking brake and move the shift lever to gine.
P (Park).
WARNING
Do not stop the engine.
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the jewelry or clothing to come into contact
windows, move the heater or air conditioner with, or get caught in, engine belts or the
temperature control to maximum hot and fan engine cooling fan. The engine cooling
control to high speed. fan can start at any time.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool- When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in For information about towing your vehicle behind
ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank Canada) and local regulations for towing must be a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”
with the engine running. Add coolant to the followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam- in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail- tion of this manual.
Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-
dealer. tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to your
vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have
the service operator carefully read the following
precautions:

WARNING
● Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
● Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION
● When towing, make sure that the trans-
mission, axles, steering system and
powertrain are in working condition. If
any unit is damaged, dollies must be
used.
● Always attach safety chains before
towing.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

– Turn the ignition key to the OFF po-
sition, and secure the steering wheel
in a straight-ahead position with a
rope or similar device. Never secure
the steering wheel by turning the ig-
nition key to the LOCK position. This
may damage the steering lock
mechanism.
– Move the gearshift lever to the N
(Neutral) position.
● When towing automatic with the rear
wheels on the ground (if you do not use
towing dollies): Always release the
WSD0087 parking brake.
CAUTION
● Never tow automatic transmission
models with the front wheels on the
ground or four wheels on the ground
(forward or backward), as this may
cause serious and expensive damage to
the transmission. If it is necessary to
WSD0086 tow the vehicle with the rear wheels
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY raised always use towing dollies under
NISSAN the front wheels.
● When towing with the front wheels on
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
towing dollies:
with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
CAUTION
an area around the front tires.
● Tow chains or cables must be attached
only to the main structural members of 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
the vehicle or the towing hooks (if so ward.
equipped). Otherwise, the vehicle body ● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
will be damaged. and D (Drive).
● Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free ● Apply the accelerator as little as possible
a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. to maintain the rocking motion.
Never tow the vehicle using the vehicle
tie downs or recovery hooks. ● Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
● Always pull the cable straight out from (Drive).
the front or rear of the vehicle. Never
pull the vehicle at an angle. ● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55
WCE0120
km/h).
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck ● Pulling devices should be routed so
they do not touch any part of the sus- 5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a few
vehicle) pension, steering, brake or cooling tries, contact a professional towing service
systems. to remove the vehicle.
Front
● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas
WARNING straps are not recommended for use in
vehicle towing or recovery.
● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
● Do not spin your tires at high speed. If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
This could cause them to explode and use the following procedure:
result in serious injury. Parts of your 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System
vehicle could also overheat and be (if so equipped).
damaged.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Most common factors contributing to vehicle
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Environmental factors influence the rate of
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

06/29/07—debbie ੭

CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve- the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
CAUTION
hicle, it is important to take proper care of it. must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the
● Do not use car washes that use acid in drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your the detergent. Some car washes, espe- open. Spray water under the body and in the
vehicle as soon as you can: cially brushless ones, use some acid for wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
● after a rainfall to prevent possible damage cleaning. The acid may react with some road salt.
from acid rain. plastic vehicle components, causing
them to crack. This could affect their A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to
● after driving on coastal roads. appearance, and also could cause them avoid water spots.
not to function properly. Always check WAXING
● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-
with your car wash to confirm that acid
pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get is not used. Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
on the paint surface. helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is
● Do not wash the vehicle with strong recommended to remove built-up wax residue
● when dust or mud builds up on the surface. household soap, strong chemical deter- and to avoid a weathered appearance before
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle gents, gasoline or solvents. re-applying wax.
inside a garage or in a covered area. ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
light or while the vehicle body is hot, as proper product.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
the surface may become water-spotted.
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body ● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-
cover. ● Avoid using tight-napped or rough
ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface wax.
must be taken when removing
when putting on or removing the body caked-on dirt or other foreign sub- ● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cover. stances so the paint surface is not cutting compounds or cleaners that may
scratched or damaged. damage the vehicle finish.
WASHING
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of
water. on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild
finish or leave swirl marks.
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
(never hot) water.
7-2 Appearance and care

06/29/07—debbie ੭

REMOVING SPOTS CAUTION CHROME PARTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, When cleaning the inside of the windows, Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant TIRE DRESSINGS
staining. Special cleaning products are available cleaners. They could damage the electri-
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory cal conductors, radio antenna elements or NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
store. rear window defroster elements. dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-
UNDERBODY ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may
react with the coating and form a compound. This
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-
compound may come off the tire while driving and
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in ened in a mild soap solution, especially during stain the vehicle paint.
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and winter months in areas where road salt is used. If
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un- not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels. If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe- following precautions:
riod and again in the spring, the underseal must CAUTION ● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-
be checked and, if necessary, retreated. Follow the directions below to avoid ing on the tire dissolves more easily with an
staining or discoloring the wheels: oil-based tire dressing.
GLASS
● Do not use a cleaner that uses strong ● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film prevent it from entering the tire
acid or alkali contents to clean the
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to
wheels.
become coated with a film after the vehicle is remove).
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft ● Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
cloth will easily remove this film. wheels when they are hot. The wheel ● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
temperature should be the same as am- towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-
bient temperature. pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.
● Rinse the wheel to completely remove ● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the mended by tire dressing manufacturer.
cleaner is applied.

Appearance and care 7-3

06/29/07—debbie ੭

CLEANING INTERIOR

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior ● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum ommended by the manufacturer.
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp- ● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-
dry, soft cloth. age the lens cover.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to FLOOR MATS
maintain the appearance of the leather. The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-
Before using any fabric protector, read the manu- tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro- easier to clean the interior. No matter what
tectors contain chemicals that may stain or mats are used, be sure they are fitted for
bleach the seat material. your vehicle and are properly positioned in
the footwell to prevent interference with
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean pedal operation. Mats should be maintained WAI0006
the meter and gauge lens. with regular cleaning and replaced if they be- Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s side
come excessively worn.
CAUTION
only)
● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi- This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to
lar material. act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor
mats have been specially designed for your ve-
● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and hicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has a
damaging to leather surfaces and grommet hole incorporated in it. Position the mat
should be removed promptly. Do not by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the
use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in
oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter- the footwell.
gents or ammonia-based cleaners as
they may damage the leather’s natural Periodically check to make certain the mats are
finish. properly positioned.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

CORROSION PROTECTION

SEAT BELTS MOST COMMON FACTORS Temperature
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. CORROSION sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade
before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance” ● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt Air pollution
in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen- and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas. Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
tal restraint system” section of this manual. in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-
● Damage to paint and other protective coat- ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-
WARNING ings caused by gravel and stone chips or erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the minor traffic accidents.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS FROM CORROSION
since these materials may severely INFLUENCE THE RATE OF ● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
weaken the seat belt webbing. CORROSION vehicle clean.
Moisture ● Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-
hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. ● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside open to avoid water accumulation.
the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to ● Check the underbody for accumulation of
avoid floor panel corrosion. sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing and where
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is
used.

Appearance and care 7-5

06/29/07—debbie ੭

CAUTION
● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
bris from the passenger compartment
by washing it out with a hose. Remove
dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
● Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and corro-
sion, which may be required in some areas, con-
sult a NISSAN dealer.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Brake pad wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
5-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Keyfob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

06/29/07—debbie ੭

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have Performing general maintenance checks requires During the normal day-to-day operation of the
minimum maintenance requirements with long minimal mechanical skill and only a few general vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
service intervals to save you both time and automotive tools. formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
money. However, some day-to-day and regular These checks or inspections can be done by you, you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
maintenance is essential to maintain your NIS- a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
SAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as its dealer. NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
emission and engine performance. should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
Where to go for service repairs are required.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general If maintenance service is required or your vehicle When performing any checks or maintenance
maintenance, is performed. appears to malfunction, have the systems work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-
checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.
tions” later in this section.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper
who are kept up-to-date with the latest service EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte- information through technical bulletins, service MAINTENANCE ITEMS
nance chain. tips, and in-dealership training programs. They
are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve- Additional information on the following
Scheduled maintenance items with “*” is found later in this section.
hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather
For your convenience, both required and optional than after they have worked on it.
scheduled maintenance items are described and
Outside the vehicle
listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
The maintenance items listed here should be
Guide.” You must refer to that guide to ensure service department performs the best job to meet
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —
that necessary maintenance is performed on your specified.
in a reliable and economical way.
NISSAN at regular intervals.
Doors and engine hood Check that the doors
General maintenance and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure
General maintenance includes those items which that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,
should be checked during normal day-to-day op- latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.
eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op- Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the
eration. It is your responsibility to perform these hood from opening when the primary latch is
maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed. released.

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

06/29/07—debbie ੭

When driving in areas using road salt or other alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at Automatic transmission P (Park) position
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your
needed. vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in
Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail ● For additional information regarding tires,
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-
operating properly and installed securely. Also (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-
check headlight aim. the Warranty Information Booklet . ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the
vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular
NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, basis. Check the windshield at least every six
away from the pedal.
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-
necessary. aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the
facility. vehicle to one side when applied.
Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every
7,500 miles (12,000 km). Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-
wear if they do not wipe properly. tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held
Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often
on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake
and always prior to long distance trips. If neces- Inside the vehicle applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,
sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the
The maintenance items listed here should be see a NISSAN dealer.
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully
for damage, cuts or excessive wear. checked on a regular basis, such as when per- Seats Check seat position controls such as seat
forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve- adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) hicle, etc. operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in
transmitter components Replace the grom- every position. Check that the head restraints
met seal, valve core and cap of the transmitter in Additional information on the following
move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so
vehicles equipped with TPMS at tire replacement items with an “*” is found later in this sec-
equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.
when reaching the wear limit of the tires. tion.
Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt
Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
should pull to either side while driving on a operation and make sure the pedal does not bind and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away and are installed securely. Check the belt web-
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel from the pedal. bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

06/29/07—debbie ੭

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer- Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily. hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
steering or strange noises. connections.
Engine oil level* Check the level after parking
Warning lights and chimes Make sure all the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off. Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-
warning lights and chimes are operating properly. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain posed to corrosive substances such as those
back into the oil pan. used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
Windshield wiper and washer* Check that important to remove these substances from the
the wipers and washer operate properly and that Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor
the wipers do not streak. supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of end of winter, the underbody should be thor-
Windshield defroster Check that the air
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or the “Appearance and care” section of this
carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and
air conditioner. manual.
driving” section of this manual.
Under the hood and vehicle Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, Windshield washer fluid* Check that there is
water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has adequate fluid in the reservoir.
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time you been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
check the engine oil or refuel). air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,
Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It check for the cause and have it corrected imme-
should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve- diately.
hicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the Power steering fluid level* and lines Check
battery fluid level. the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine
off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,
Brake fluid levels* Make sure that the brake cracks, etc.
fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on
the reservoir. Radiator and hoses Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or maintenance ● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto- CAUTION
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent matic engine cooling fan. It may come
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to on at any time without warning, even if ● Do not work under the hood while the
the vehicle. The following are general precau- the ignition key is in the OFF position engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
tions which should be closely observed. and the engine is not running. To avoid wait until it cools down.
injury, always disconnect the negative ● Avoid contact with used engine oil and
WARNING battery cable before working near the coolant. Improperly disposed engine
fan. oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap- fluids can damage the environment. Al-
ply the parking brake securely and ● If you must run the engine in an en- ways conform to local regulations for
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle closed space such as a garage, be sure disposal of vehicle fluid.
from moving. Move the shift selector there is proper ventilation for exhaust ● Never leave the engine or automatic
lever to P (Park). gases to escape. transmission related component har-
● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or ● Never get under the vehicle while it is nesses disconnected while the ignition
LOCK position when performing any supported only by a jack. If it is neces- switch is in the ON position.
parts replacement or repairs. sary to work under the vehicle, support ● Never connect or disconnect the battery
● If you must work with the engine run- it with safety stands. or any transistorized component while
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair ● Keep smoking materials, flame and the ignition switch is in the ON position.
and tools away from moving fans, belts sparks away from the fuel tank and This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
and any other moving parts. battery. gives instructions regarding only those items
● It is advisable to secure or remove any ● On gasoline engine models, the fuel which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
loose clothing and remove any jewelry, filter or fuel lines should be serviced by A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-
such as rings, watches, etc. before a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-
working on your vehicle. are under high pressure even when the der information” in the “Technical and consumer
● Always wear eye protection whenever engine is off. information” section of this manual.
you work on your vehicle. You should be aware that incomplete or improper
servicing may result in operating difficulties or
excessive emissions, and could affect warranty
coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,
have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS

1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Air cleaner
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Battery
6. Fuse/fusible link box
7. Transmission dipstick
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Radiator cap
10. Drive belt location
11. Fuse block
12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
13. Engine coolant reservoir
NOTE:
Engine cover removed for clarity.

WDI0515


06/29/07—debbie ੭

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
CAUTION
with Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti- When adding or replacing coolant, be sure
freeze and coolant protection. The anti-freeze to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life
solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Antifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalent
Additional engine cooling system additives are with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-
not necessary. freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled
water. The use of other types of coolant
solutions or coolant colors, such as or-
WARNING
ange, may damage the engine cooling
● Never remove the radiator or coolant system.
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool Outside temperature Genuine Demineral-
down. Serious burns could be caused down to NISSAN ized or dis-
by high pressure fluid escaping from Long Life tilled water
Antifreeze/ LDI0350
the radiator. See precautions in “If your °C °F
vehicle overheats” found in the “In case Coolant or CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
equivalent
of emergency” section of this manual. LEVEL
-35 -30 50% 50%
● The radiator is equipped with a pres- Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en- the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
gine damage, use only a genuine the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the
NISSAN radiator cap. reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the
radiator when the engine is cold. If there is
insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and also add
it to the reservoir up to the MAX level.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN
dealer.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

ENGINE OIL

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.
The service procedure can be found in the
NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheat-
ing.

WARNING
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the en-
gine is hot.
● Never remove the radiator cap when the LDI0351 WDI0175
engine is hot. Serious burns could be CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
caused by high pressure fluid escaping level. It should be between the H (High) and
from the radiator. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply L (Low) marks ᭺. This is the normal oper-
B
the parking brake.
● Avoid direct skin contact with used ating oil level range. If the oil level is below
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches the L (Low) mark ᭺, remove the oil filler cap
A
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner operating temperature. and pour recommended oil through the
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 opening. Do not overfill ᭺. C

● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil- minutes for the oil to drain back into 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
dren and pets. the oil pan.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re- maintenance intervals or during the
Check your local regulations. insert it all the way. break-in period, depending on the severity
of operating conditions.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and
CAUTION
replace it at this time. See “Changing engine
Oil level should be checked regularly. Op- oil filter” later in this section.
erating the engine with an insufficient
amount of oil can damage the engine, and WARNING
such damage is not covered by warranty.
● Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
● Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
● Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
WDI0493

CHANGING ENGINE OIL CAUTION
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
the parking brake. oil may be hot.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches ● Waste oil must be disposed of prop-
operating temperature, then turn it off. erly.
3. Remove the oil filler cap ᭺ by turning it
A ● Check your local regulations.
counterclockwise.
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with
᭺.
B a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
5. Remove the drain plug ᭺ with a wrench by
B Drain plug tightening torque:
turning it counterclockwise and completely 22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)
drain the oil.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

7. Refill engine with recommended oil through 5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with
the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler a clean rag.
cap securely.
CAUTION
See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con- Be sure to remove any old gasket material
sumer information” section of this manual for remaining on the sealing surface of the
drain and refill capacity. engine. Failure to do so could lead to
engine failure.
The drain and refill capacity depends on the
oil temperature and drain time. Use these 6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
specifications for reference only. Always use engine oil.
the dipstick to determine when the proper
amount of oil is in the engine. 7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance
is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around
the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re- WDI0495 8. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
quired. CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if
minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. the parking brake.
Add engine oil if necessary. necessary.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter ᭺.
A

4. Loosen the oil filter ᭺ with an oil filter
A
wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then
remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

5-SPEED AUTOMATIC POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID
TRANSMISSION FLUID

When checking or replacement is required, we For further brake fluid specification information,
recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing. refer to “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer
CAUTION information” section of this manual.
● Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF.
Do not mix with other fluids.
WARNING
● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-
● Using automatic transmission fluid
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated
other than Genuine NISSAN Matic K
fluid may damage the brake system.
ATF will cause deterioration in drive-
The use of improper fluids can damage
ability and automatic transmission du-
the brake system and affect the vehi-
rability, and may damage the automatic
cle’s stopping ability.
transmission, which is not covered by
the NISSAN new vehicle limited ● Be sure to clean the filler cap before
warranty. WDI0256 removing.
The specified automatic transmission fluid is also The fluid level should be checked using the HOT
described on caution labels located in the engine MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir CAUTION
compartment. at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° - Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-
80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera- spilled, immediately wash the surface
tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C). with water.
If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine
NISSAN PSF. Remove the cap and fill through
the opening.

CAUTION
● DO NOT OVERFILL.
● Recommended fluid is Genuine
NISSAN PSF or equivalent.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of win-
dow washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-
shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-
freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION
● Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for window washer solution.
This may result in damage to the paint.
● Do not fill the window washer reservoir
tank with washer fluid concentrates at
WDI0512 LDI0355
full strength. Some methyl alcohol
BRAKE FLUID WINDOW WASHER FLUID based washer fluid concentrates may
RESERVOIR permanently stain the grille if spilled
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the while filling the window washer reser-
fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically. voir tank.
warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Add window washer fluid when the low window
Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT ● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
washer fluid warning light comes on. water to the manufacturer’s recom-
3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added
frequently, the system should be checked by a To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the mended levels before pouring the fluid
NISSAN dealer. cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window into the window washer reservoir tank.
washer fluid into the tank opening. Do not use the window washer reservoir
tank to mix the washer fluid concen-
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better trate and water.
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions for the mixture ratio.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

BATTERY

● Keep the battery surface clean and dry. ● When working on or near a battery, al-
Clean the battery with a solution of baking ways wear suitable eye protection and
soda and water. remove all jewelry.
● Make certain the terminal connections are ● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-
clean and securely tightened. cessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds. Wash hands after handling.
● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery ● Keep battery out of the reach of
terminal cable to prevent discharge. children.

WARNING
● Do not expose the battery to flames or
electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener-
ated by the battery is explosive. Do not WDI0224
allow battery fluid to contact your skin,
1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriver
eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. After
as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery
touching a battery or battery cap, do not
case.
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly
wash your hands. If the acid contacts
your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15 minutes
and seek medical attention.
● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce bat-
tery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

DRIVE BELT

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”
in the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual. If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.

WDI0644
1. Power steering fluid pump
2. Crankshaft
3. Idler pulley
4. Generator
5. Air conditioner
WARNING
LDI0302 Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is LOCK position before servicing drive belt.
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled The engine could rotate unexpectedly.
water to bring the level up to the bottom of
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
the filler opening. Do not overfill.
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is
in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced
or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

SPARK PLUGS

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-
WARNING
tion and tension in accordance with the
maintenance schedule found in the Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.

CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-
move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket
can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN
dealer for assistance.

SDI1895

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Platinum-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped ᭺
A
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-
low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service
platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-
gapping.
● Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

AIR CLEANER

WARNING
● Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or oth-
ers to be burned. The air cleaner not
only cleans the air, it stops the flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed, and be careful when working
on the engine with the air cleaner
removed.
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
LDI0357 cleaner removed. Doing so could result
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and in serious injury.
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
nance Guide.” When replacing the filter, wipe the The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-
inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the borne dust and pollen particles and reduces
cover with a damp cloth. some objectionable outside odors. The filter is
located behind the glove box. Refer to the
To remove the air cleaner filter: “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for
᭺
1 Loosen the screw. change intervals.

᭺
2 Disconnect the electrical connector. If replacement is required, see your NISSAN
dealer.
᭺
3 Unlatch the clips and remove the air cleaner
cover. Remove the air cleaner filter.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

WDI0194

CLEANING 4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
CAUTION
arm until it clicks into place.
If your windshield is not clear after using the Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters age the windshield and impair driver CAUTION
when running, wax or other material may be on vision.
the blade or windshield. ● After wiper blade replacement, return
REPLACING the wiper arm to its original position;
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer otherwise it may be damaged when the
solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. hood is opened.
clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear
water. ᭺
1 Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield. ● Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked ᭺
2 Push the release tab, then move the wiper aged from wind pressure.
in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then blade down the wiper arm to remove.
rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-
shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades
᭺
3 Remove the wiper blade.
and using the wiper, replace the blades.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

WDI0337
Be careful not to let anything get into the washer
nozzle ᭺. This may cause clogging or improper
A
windshield washer operation. If something gets
into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small
pin ᭺.
B


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LDI0356
Rear window wiper blade
᭺
1 Lift the wiper arm away from the rear win-
dow.
᭺
2 Push the wiper blade in and pivot until the
blade becomes free.
᭺
3 Insert a new blade onto the wiper arm and
snap into place.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

BRAKES FUSES

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the Proper brake inspection intervals should
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer. be followed. For more information regarding
brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-
SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting vice and Maintenance Guide”.
brakes.
The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust
every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system
check if the brake pedal height does not
return to normal.
LDI0358
BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS ENGINE COMPARTMENT
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re- CAUTION
placement, a high pitched scraping or screech- Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in amperage rating than specified on the
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the fuse box cover. This could damage the
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes electrical system or cause a fire.
checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator
If any electrical equipment does not come on,
sound is heard.
check for an open fuse.
Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may
switch are OFF.
be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the 2. Open the engine hood.
function or performance of the brake system.

06/29/07—debbie ੭

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the
tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The
fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse
block in the passenger compartment.

WDI0452 LDI0516
5. If the fuse is open ᭺, replace it with a new
A PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
fuse ᭺.B

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical CAUTION
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
dealer. amperage rating than specified on the
Fusible links fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
If the electrical equipment does not operate and
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible If any electrical equipment does not operate,
links. If any of these fusible links are melted, check for an open fuse.
replace with only genuine NISSAN parts. 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

2. Pull the sunglasses holder down to open ᭺.
1

3. Pull up on the sunglasses holder ᭺ and
2
remove to expose the fuse panel.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

WDI0452 LDI0456
Type A Type B
5. If the fuse is open ᭺, replace it with an
A
equivalent good fuse ᭺.
B

6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
7. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow
the battery and removed parts.

LDI0484

KEYFOB ᭺
3 Install a new battery ᭺ with the “+” facing
C
down.
Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:
● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the
᭺
1 Open the lid using a coin ᭺.
A battery across the contact points will seri-
᭺
2 Remove the battery ᭺.
B ously deplete the storage capacity.


06/29/07—debbie ੭

LIGHTS

● Do not touch the internal circuit and electric This device complies with Part 15 of the HEADLIGHTS
terminals as it could cause a malfunction. FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Replacing the halogen headlight bulb
Canada.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent. The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which
Operation is subject to the following two
᭺
4 Close the lid securely. conditions: (1) This device may not cause uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. If
harmful interference, and (2) this device replacement is required, see your NISSAN
5. Press the button, then the dealer.
button two or three times to check the key- must accept any interference received, in-
fob operation. cluding interference that may cause undes-
ired operation of the device. CAUTION
If the battery is removed for any reason ● High pressure halogen gas is sealed
other than replacement, perform step 5. inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
● An improperly disposed battery can break if the glass envelope is scratched
hurt the environment. Always confirm or the bulb is dropped.
local regulations for battery disposal. ● When handling the bulb, do not touch
the glass envelope.
● The k

2008 QUEST OWNER'S MANUAL

More Related Content

What's hot

Similar to 2008 QUEST OWNER'S MANUAL

More from Classic Cars Nissan

Recently uploaded

2008 QUEST OWNER'S MANUAL